Epson S1C62 Family User Manual

MF599-06  
-
CMOS 4 BIT SINGLE CHIP MICROCOMPUTER  
S1C62 Family  
Development Tool Reference Manual  
NOTICE  
No part of this material may be reproduced or duplicated in any form or by any means without the written permission of Seiko  
Epson. Seiko Epson reserves the right to make changes to this material without notice. Seiko Epson does not assume any  
liability of any kind arising out of any inaccuracies contained in this material or due to its application or use in any product or  
circuit and, further, there is no representation that this material is applicable to products requiring high level reliability, such  
as medical products. Moreover, no license to any intellectual property rights is granted by implication or otherwise, and there  
is no representation or warranty that anything made in accordance with this material will be free from any patent or copyright  
infringement of a third party. This material or portions thereof may contain technology or the subject relating to strategic  
products under the control of the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law of Japan and may require an export license from  
the Ministry of International Trade and Industry or other approval from another government agency.  
MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, Windows 98 and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation, U.S.A.  
PC-DOS, PC/AT, PS/2, VGA, EGA and IBM are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation, U.S.A.  
NEC PC-9800 Series and NEC are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation.  
All other product names mentioned herein are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective owners.  
© SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION 2001 All rights reserved.  
S1C62 Family Development Tool Reference Manual  
Preface  
The explanation covering the outline and operation of the development support tools for the CMOS 4-bit  
Single Chip Microcomputer S1C62 Family has been divided into the following parts.  
I.  
INTRODUCTION  
II.  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM DMS6200  
III. CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
IV. MELODY ASSEMBLER MLA628X  
V.  
FUNCTION OPTION GENERATOR FOG62XX  
VI. SEGMENT OPTION GENERATOR SOG62XX  
VII. EVALUATION BOARD S5U1C62XXXE  
VIII. ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
IX. MASK DATA CHECKER MDC62XX  
Before Reading . . .  
This manual indicates the model name as "S1C62XXX" and source file and output files as "C2XXYYY" for  
purposes of explanation of the common content in each model of the S1C62 Family. You should substitute  
the "XXX" parts for the various model names. Please allow Seiko Epson to specify the "YYY" section for  
each customer.  
Example: When the development model is S1C6S460, and the "YYY" section is to be specified as "0A0".  
S1C6XXXX  
CXXXYYY  
S1C6S460  
CS460A0  
Reference Manual  
The peculiar content of each model, device details and the like are explained in the below manual. You  
should refer to it as required.  
Development Tools  
S5U1C62xxxD Manual (Development Software Tool for S1C62xxx)  
S5U1C62xxxE Manual (Evaluation Board for S1C62xxx)  
S5U1C62000H Manual (S1C60/62 Family In-Circuit Emulator)  
Device (S1C62xxx)  
Instructions  
S1C62xxx Technical Manual  
S1C6200/6200A Core CPU Manual  
In this manual, "ICE" and "evaluation board" indicate S5U1C62000H and S5U1C62xxxE, respectively.  
I
S1C62 FAMILY DEVELOPMENT TOOL  
INTRODUCTION  
This part explains the composition of the develop-  
ment support tool for the 4-bit Single Chip Micro-  
computer S1C62 Family and the developmental  
environment.  
INTRODUCTION  
INTRODUCTION  
Co nte nts  
1 TYPES OF DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT TOOLS ____________________I-1  
1.1 Composition of the Software Development Tools S5U1C62xxxD...........................I-1  
1.2 Composition of the Hardware Tools .......................................................................I-1  
2 DEVELOPMENTAL ENVIRONMENT_____________________________I-2  
3 DEVELOPMENT FLOW ________________________________________I-2  
4 INSTALLATION _______________________________________________I-4  
5 DIFFERENCES FROM MODEL TO MODEL AND PRECAUTIONS ___I-5  
6 TROUBLESHOOTING __________________________________________I-6  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
I-i  
INTRODUCTION  
1 TYPES OF DEVELOPMENT  
SUPPORT TOOLS  
Here we will explain the composition of the software and hardware for the development support tools.  
1.1 Composition of the Software Development Tools S5U1C62xxxD  
The below software are included in the software development support tools used in each S1C62XXX  
model.  
1. Development Tool Management System DMS6200 .. Menu selections for each software / start-up software  
2. Cross Assembler ASM62XX ...................................... Cross assembler for program preparation  
3. Melody Assembler MLA628X (Note) .......................... Melody data preparation program  
4. Function Option Generator FOG62XX ....................... Function option data preparation program  
5. Segment Option Generator SOG62XX (Note) ........... Segment option data preparation program  
6. ICE Control Software ICS62XX .................................. ICE control program  
7. Mask Data Checker MDC62XX .................................. Mask data preparation program  
Note The 3 Melody Assembler MLA628X are only set in the models (S1C62N8X) that have melody  
functions.  
The 5 Segment Option Generator SOG62XX are only set in models that have LCD driver and  
segment options.  
1.2 Composition of the Hardware Tools  
The following two types have been prepared for all types as hardware development support systems.  
1. In-Circuit Emulator S5U1C62000H..... In-circuit emulator permitting high level debugging (common to each  
model)  
2. Evaluation Board S5U1C62xxxE ........ Evaluation board that has the same functions as the actual IC (different  
for each model)  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
I-1  
INTRODUCTION  
2 DEVELOPMENTAL ENVIRONMENT  
The software product of the development support tool S5U1C62xxxD operates on the following host  
systems:  
• IBM PC/AT (at least PC-DOS Ver. 2.0)  
When developing the S1C62XXX, the above-mentioned host computer, editor, P-ROM writer, printer, etc.  
must be prepared by the user in addition to the development tool which is normally supported by Seiko  
Epson.  
S1C62xxx Development Tool  
Host computer  
(IBM PC/AT)  
Software tools  
S5U1C62000A  
S5U1C62xxxD  
DMS6200  
SOG62xx  
ICS62xx  
MDC62xx  
ASM62xx  
PC-DOS  
Editor  
MLA628x  
FOG62xx  
Target board  
Hardware tools  
ICE  
Evaluation Board  
RS-232C  
S5U1C62000H  
S5U1C62xxxE  
P-ROM writer  
Printer  
To be prepared by the user  
Fig. 2.1 System configuration  
Note The S5U1C62xxxD system requires a host computer with a RAM capacity of about 140K bytes.  
Since the ICE (S5U1C62000H) is connected to the host computer with a RS-232C serial interface,  
adapter board for asynchronous communication will be required depending on the host computer  
used.  
3 DEVELOPMENT FLOW  
Figure 3.1 shows the development flow through the S5U1C62xxxD.  
Concerning file names  
All the input-output file name for the each development support tool commonly use "C2XXYYY". In  
principle each file should be produced in this manner. Seiko Epson will designate the "YYY" for each  
customer.  
I-2  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
INTRODUCTION  
*1, *2  
Determination of  
*1  
Determination of  
software specifications  
hardware specifications  
*2, *3, *4  
*4, *5  
Melody generation  
and coding  
*4, *5  
*4, *5  
Segment option list  
generation  
*1, *6  
Flow chart generation  
and coding  
Function option list  
generation  
Creation of  
target board  
*4, *5  
Development support tool  
selection on menu of  
Development Tool  
Management System DMS6200  
Function  
option  
list  
Segment  
option  
list  
Coding  
sheet  
Coding  
sheet  
Source file generation  
by using editor  
Source file generation  
by using editor  
Source file generation  
by using editor  
Program  
source file  
Melody  
source file  
Segment option  
source file  
C2XXYYY  
.DAT  
C28XYYY  
.MDT  
C2XXYYY  
.SEG  
*4, *5  
*4, *5  
*4, *5  
*4, *5  
Cross Assembler  
ASM62XX execution  
Melody Assembler  
MLA628X execution  
Function Option Generator  
FOG62XX execution  
Segment Option Generator  
SOG62XX execution  
C2XXYYY  
C28XYYY  
.PRN  
.MPR  
Assembly list  
Melody  
assembly list  
C2XXYYYL Object file  
.HEX  
C2XXYYYH  
.HEX  
C28XYYYA  
.DOC  
C2XXYYYF  
.DOC  
C2XXYYYS  
.DOC  
Melody  
document file  
Function option  
document file  
Segment option  
document file  
Function  
option  
HEX file  
Segment  
option  
HEX file  
Melody  
HEX file  
C28XYYYA  
.HEX  
C2XXYYYF  
.HEX  
C2XXYYYS  
.HEX  
Segment  
option ROM  
(two)  
Function  
option ROM  
(one)  
Target board  
*4, *5  
ICE  
Evaluation Board  
S5U1C62xxxE  
Debugging with  
ICE Control Software  
ICS62XX  
S5U1C62000H  
*4, *7  
*6  
Debugging  
completion  
*4, *5  
Mask Data Checker  
MDC62XX execution  
Note The melody and segment option flow are  
only valid in models possessing those  
functions.  
File for  
submission  
C62XXYYY  
.PAn  
SEIKO EPSON  
Fig. 3.1 S5U1C62xxxD development flow  
Reference manual  
*1 S1C62xxx Technical Manual (Hardware)  
*5 S5U1C62xxxD Manual  
*6 S5U1C62xxxE Manual  
*7 S5U1C62000H Manual  
*2 S1C62xxx Technical Manual (Software)  
*3 S1C6200/6200A Core CPU Manual  
*4 S1C62 Family Development Tool Reference Manual (this manual)  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
I-3  
INTRODUCTION  
4 INSTALLATION  
The S5U1C62xxxD tools are included on the CD-ROM of the S5U1C62000A (S1C60/ 62 Family Assembler  
Package), and they can be installed in your hard disk using the installer (Setup.exe) on the CD-ROM.  
Refer to the "S5U1C62000A Manual" for how to install the S5U1C62xxxD tools.  
Note The DMS6200 configures a menu from files that are located in the current directory. Therefore, do  
not move the development tools from the directory in which the DMS6200 exists.  
To invoke an editor (DOS version) or other programs from the DMS6200, copy those executable  
files to the directory in which the DMS6200 exists.  
I-4  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
INTRODUCTION  
5 DIFFERENCES FROM MODEL TO  
MODEL AND PRECAUTIONS  
There may be some models in which the following two types software tools contained in the  
S5U1C62xxxD are not included.  
(1) Segment Option Generator SOG62XX  
This is not included in the software tools of models in which the segment option has not been set.  
(2) Melody Assembler MLA628X  
This is not included in the software tools for the models (Other than S1C62N8X) that do not have the  
melody function.  
Please be aware of the following points in setting the host system.  
(1) The S5U1C62xxxD system requires a host computer with a RAM capacity of about 140K bytes.  
(2) Since the ICE is connected to the host computer with a RS-232C serial interface, adapter board for  
asynchronous communication will be required depending on the host computer used.  
(3) In order for the MDC62XX to handle numerous files, set the number of files described in the  
CONFIG.SYS to 10 or more (e.g., FILES = 20).  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
I-5  
INTRODUCTION  
6 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Tool  
ICE  
Problem  
Remedy measures  
Check the following and remedy if necessary:  
• Is the RS-232C cable connected correctly?  
• Is the RS-232C driver installed?  
• Is MODE.COM on the disk?  
Nothing appears on the screen, or  
S5U1C62000H nothing works, after activation.  
• Is the execution file correct?  
PC-DOS  
ICS62XXW.EXE  
• Is the DOS version correct?  
PC-DOS  
Ver. 2.1 or later  
• Is the DIP switches that set the baud rate of the main ICE  
unit set correctly?  
• Is the fuse of the ICE cut off?  
The ICE fuse cut immediately after  
activation.  
Check the following and remedy if necessary:  
• Are connectors F1 and F5 connected to the evaluation  
board correctly?  
• Is the target board power short-circuiting?  
The wrong version of ICE is being used. Use the latest  
<ILLEGAL VERSION ICE6200>  
appears on the screen immediately after version.  
activation.  
<ILLEGAL VERSION PARAMETER  
FILE> appears on the screen immedi-  
ately after activation.  
The wrong version of ICS62XXP.PAR is being used. Use  
the latest version.  
Immediate values A (10) and B (11)  
cannot be entered correctly with the A  
command.  
The A and B registers are reserved for the entry of A and B.  
Write 0A and 0B when entering A (10) and B (11).  
Example: LD  
A, B  
Data in the B register is  
loaded into the A register.  
Immediate value A is loaded  
into the B register.  
LD  
B, 0A  
<UNUSED AREA> is displayed by the This massage is output when the address following one in  
SD command.  
which data is written is unused. It does not indicates  
problem. Data is correctly set in areas other than the read-  
only area.  
You can not do a real-time run in  
break-trace mode.  
Output from the evaluation board is  
impossible when data is written to the I/  
O memory for Buzzer and Fout output  
with the ICE command.  
Since the CPU stops temporarily when breaking conditions  
are met, executing in a real-time is not performed.  
Output is possible only in the real-time run mode.  
SOG62XX An R error occurs although the address  
is correctly set in the segment source  
file.  
Check the following and remedy if necessary:  
• Does the address symbol use capital letters?  
• Are the output ports set for every two terminals?  
I-6  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
INTRODUCTION  
Tool  
Problem  
Remedy measures  
ASM62XX An R error occurs although the final  
The cross assembler is designed to output "R error" every  
time the page is changed. Use a pseudo-instruction to set the  
memory, such as ORG or PAGE, to change the page. See  
"Memory setting pseudo-instructions" in the cross assem-  
bler manual.  
page is passed.  
MDC62XX Activation is impossible.  
Check the following and remedy if necessary:  
• Is the number of files set at ten or more in OS environ-  
ment file CONFIG.SYS?  
MLA628X No melody is output.  
Check the following and remedy if necessary:  
Has the OPTLD command of the ICE been executed? (When  
the ICE is connected to the evaluation board  
)
• Is the MELODY ROM installed? (When the evaluation  
board is used independently)  
• Is the attack bit of the melody data set to "1"?  
Check the following and remedy if necessary:  
• Has the EPROM for F.HEX and S.HEX been replaced by  
the EPROM for the target?  
Evaluation The evaluation board does not work  
board  
when it is used independently.  
S5U1C62xxxE  
• Is the EPROM for F.HEX and S.HEX installed correctly?  
• Is the appropriate voltage being supplied? (5V DC, 3 A,  
or more)  
• Are the program ROMs (H and L) installed correctly?  
• Is data written from address 4000H? (When the 27C256  
is used as the program ROM)  
• Is the EN/DIS switch on the evaluation board set to EN?  
Check the following and remedy if necessary:  
• Is an EPROM with an access time of 170 ns or less being  
used for S.HEX.  
Target segment does not light.  
• Has the VADJ VR inside the evaluation board top cover  
been turned to a lower setting?  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
I-7  
II  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM  
DMS6200  
This part mainly explains how to operate the De-  
velopment Tool Management System DMS6200.  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM DMS6200  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM  
Co nte nts  
1 DIFFERENCES DEPENDING ON THE MODEL __________________ II-1  
2 DMS6200 OUTLINE ___________________________________________ II-1  
3 DMS6200 OPERATION PROCEDURE ___________________________ II-2  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
II-i  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM DMS6200  
1 DIFFERENCES DEPENDING  
ON THE MODEL  
The DMS6200 is a software tool that is common to the all models of the S1C62 Family and there is  
no difference in operating procedure. However, the content of such things as the menu screen may vary  
due to differences in the configuration of the software for each model and differences in the directory  
content in the DMS6200.  
The below two types that are included in the explanation and display screen examples may not be present  
in certain models.  
(1) The SOG62XX and C2XXYYYS.* are only available in models offering the segment option.  
(2) The MLA628X, C28XYYY.M* and C28XYYYA.* are only available in models offering the melody  
function.  
When models that do not have the above functions are used, disregard the respective program names and  
file names indicated in the manual.  
Refer to the "S5U1C62xxxD Manual" for the software tools included in the S5U1C62xxxD.  
2 DMS6200 OUTLINE  
The DMS6200 (Development Tool Management System) is a software which selects the  
S5U1C62xxxD software development support tool and the program such as an editor in menu form and  
starts it.  
In this way the various software frequently executed during debugging can be effectively activated.  
Figure 2.1 shows the DMS6200 execution flow.  
DMS6200  
Menu  
selections  
ASM62XX  
MLA628X  
FOG62XX  
SOG62XX  
ICS62XX  
MDC62XX  
Editor etc.  
To DOS  
Fig. 2.1 DMS6200 execution flow  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
II-1  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM DMS6200  
3 DMS6200 OPERATION PROCEDURE  
Set the directory containing the respective software development support tools into the current  
directory prior to activating the DMS6200.  
Since the development support tools each require input files (e.g., source file), first create the input files  
according to the support tool manuals and then perform the following operations:  
(1) The following is entered on the current drive:  
indicates the return key.  
DMS6200  
The title is then displayed. To return to DOS at this point, press ^C (CTRL + C).  
Initial screen  
*** E0C6200 Development tool Management System. --- Ver 1.0 ***  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEE  
PPPPPPPP  
PPPPPPPPPP  
PPP  
PPP  
PPPPPPPPPP  
PPPPPPPP  
PPP  
PPP  
PPP  
PPP  
SSSSSSS  
SSS SSSS  
SSS SSS  
SSS  
SSSSSS  
SSSS  
SSS  
SSS  
SSS  
SSSSSSS  
OOOOOOOO  
OOO OOO  
OOO OOO  
NNN  
NNNN  
NNNNN  
NNNNNN NNN  
NNN NNN NNN  
NNN NNNNNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
PPP  
PPP  
EEE  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEE  
EEE  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEEEEEEEEE  
NNNNN  
NNNN  
NNN  
SSS  
SSSS  
OOO  
OOO  
OOOOOOOO  
NN  
(C) Copyright 1991 SEIKO EPSON CORP.  
STRIKE ANY KEY.  
(2) Press any key and the following menu screen will be displayed. A list of all executable files having  
"EXE", "COM" and "BAT" extensions will appear on this menu screen; if any execution file other than  
S5U1C62xxxD were copied to the current drive for execution, it will differ from the displays shown  
below.  
Menu screen  
DMS6200 Version 1.0  
Copyright(C) SEIKO EPSON CORP. 1991.  
1) ASM62XX .EXE  
2) FOG62XX .EXE  
3) ICS62XXB.BAT  
4) ICS62XXW.EXE  
5) MDC62XX .EXE  
6) MLA628X .EXE  
7) SOG62XX .EXE  
Input Number ? [  
]
To return to DOS at this point, press the "ESC" key.  
II-2  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM DMS6200  
(3) Input the number of the development support tool you wish to start and then press the "RETURN" key.  
Next, the screen for entering the source file will be displayed.  
Input Number ? [1 ]  
(4) The following sample screen is the screen which will be displayed when ASM62XX is selected.  
Input the number of the source file.  
Pressing the "ESC" key here will return the previous screen.  
When the source file is selected by number, the edit line enclosed in [ ] will appear; enter the option  
parameter if necessary. The "BS" key is valid on the edit line. Press the "RETURN" key when input is  
completed.  
Source file selection screen  
DMS6200 Version 1.0  
Copyright(C) SEIKO EPSON CORP. 1991.  
1)  
2)  
3)  
4)  
5)  
6)  
7)  
8)  
9)  
10)  
11)  
12)  
13)  
14)  
C2XXYYY .DAT  
C28XYYY .MDT  
C28XYYY .MPR  
C2XXYYY .PRN  
C2XXYYY .SEG  
C28XYYYA.DOC  
C28XYYYA.HEX  
C2XXYYYF.DOC  
C2XXYYYF.HEX  
C2XXYYYH.HEX  
C2XXYYYL.HEX  
C2XXYYYS.DOC  
C2XXYYYS.HEX  
C62XXYYY.PA0  
Input Number ? [1 ]  
Edit > [ASM62XX C2XXYYY  
]
The above operation will activate the ASM62XX. (The MLA628X will also activate with the same  
operation.)  
When the source file is in another file or directory it will not be displayed in the menu. In such cases  
you skip the number input using the return key and input the drive/ directory and source file name in  
the edit line.  
When starting, press the "RETURN" key twice particularly for the support tools which do not require  
source files (except the ASM62XX and the MLA628X).  
Refer to the support manuals regarding operations after starting.  
(5) When execution of the development support tool is completed, the following message will appear:  
Input Any Key ...  
Press any key and the first menu screen will be returned.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
II-3  
III  
CROSS ASSEMBLER  
ASM62XX  
This part mainly explains how to operate the  
Cross Assembler ASM62XX for the S1C62  
Family, and how to generate source files.  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
Co nte nts  
1 DIFFERENCES DEPENDING ON THE MODEL __________________ III-1  
2 ASM62XX OUTLINE __________________________________________ III-2  
2.1 Outline ................................................................................................................... III-2  
2.2 ASM62XX Input/Output Files ................................................................................ III-2  
3 ASM62XX OPERATION PROCEDURE __________________________ III-3  
3.1 Starting ASM62XX ................................................................................................ III-3  
3.2 Selecting Auto-Page-Set Function......................................................................... III-5  
3.3 Generating a Cross-Reference Table .................................................................... III-5  
4 SOURCE FILE FORMAT _____________________________________ III-6  
4.1 Source File Name .................................................................................................. III-6  
4.2 Statements .............................................................................................................. III-6  
4.2.1 Label field .................................................................................................... III-6  
4.2.2 Mnemonic field ............................................................................................ III-7  
4.2.3 Operand field ............................................................................................... III-7  
4.2.4 Comment field .............................................................................................. III-7  
4.3 Index ...................................................................................................................... III-7  
4.3.1 Label ............................................................................................................ III-7  
4.3.2 Symbol ......................................................................................................... III-8  
4.4 Constant and Operational Expression .................................................................. III-8  
4.4.1 Numeric constant ......................................................................................... III-8  
4.4.2 Character constant ...................................................................................... III-8  
4.4.3 Operator ...................................................................................................... III-9  
4.4.4 Location counter ......................................................................................... III-10  
4.5 Pseudo-Instructions .............................................................................................. III-11  
4.5.1 Data definition pseudo-instructions ........................................................... III-11  
4.5.2 Memory setting pseudo-instructions ........................................................... III-12  
4.5.3 Assembler control pseudo-instructions ...................................................... III-15  
4.6 Macro-Functions .................................................................................................. III-15  
4.6.1 Macro-instructions ..................................................................................... III-15  
4.6.2 Macro-definitions ....................................................................................... III-16  
4.6.3 Macro-calls ................................................................................................. III-17  
5 ERROR MESSAGES __________________________________________ III-19  
APPENDIX ASM62XX EXECUTION EXAMPLE __________________ III-20  
1) Source file (C2XX0A0.DAT) ........................................................................... III-20  
2) Running the assembler (display on the console) ............................................. III-21  
3) Assembly listing file (C2XX0A0.PRN) ............................................................ III-22  
4) Object files (C2XX0A0H.HEX, C2XX0A0L.HEX) .......................................... III-23  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
III-i  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
1 DIFFERENCES DEPENDING  
ON THE MODEL  
Since the memory capacity will vary with each model of the S1C62 Family you must pay attention  
to the following points when preparing a program.  
The limiting items for each model are indicated in the "S5U1C62xxxD Manual".  
ROM area  
The ROM capacity will vary depending on the model.  
The number of banks (16 pages/ bank) and the number of pages (256 steps/ page) are determined by  
this ROM capacity and the memory setting pseudo-instruction and the "PSET" instruction is limited to  
within its range.  
Valid specification range  
ORG pseudo-instruction:  
PAGE pseudo-instruction:  
BANK pseudo-instruction:  
0000HROM final step  
00Hnumber of page - 1  
1 bank configuration model 0H only  
2 bank configuration model 0H and 1H  
00Hnumber of page - 1  
PSET instruction:  
When a specification beyond this valid specification range is made to the ASM62XX an error is pro-  
duced.  
RAM area  
The RAM capacity varies depending on the model.  
The number of pages (256 words/ page) is determined according to the RAM capacity. Also, the  
undefined area includes from the 0 address to the final RAM address.  
When an undefined address is set in the index register, memory access to it becomes invalid, but be  
careful that no errors develop in the ASM62XX.  
Undefined code  
In the S1C62 Family, the instruction set is not different from model to model. However, you may not be  
able to use instructions such as the SLP instruction and those that access the page section (XP and YP)  
of the index register depending on the RAM content.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
III-1  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
2 ASM62XX OUTLINE  
2.1 Outline  
The ASM62XX cross assembler (the ASM62XX in this manual) is an assembler program for generating the  
machine code used by the S1C62XXX 4-bit, single-chip microcomputers. It can be used under PC-DOS.  
The Cross Assembler ASM62XX will assemble the  
program source files which have been input by the  
user's editor and will generate an object file in Intel-  
Hex format and assembly list file.  
A>EDLIN C2XXYYY.DAT  
Create the source file  
In this assembler, program modularization has been  
made possible through macro definition functions and  
programming independent of the ROM page structure  
has been made possible through the auto page set  
function. In addition, consideration has also been given  
to precise error checks for program capacity (ROM  
capacity) overflows, undefined codes and the like, and  
for debugging of such things as label tables for assem-  
bly list files and cross reference table supplements.  
C2XXYYY  
.DAT  
A>ASM62XX C2XXYYY  
Execute the cross assembler  
Error  
message  
C2XXYYY  
.PRN  
C2XXYYYL  
.HEX  
C2XXYYYH  
.HEX  
Assembly  
listing file  
Object file  
The program name of the assembler is ASM62XX.EXE.  
Figure 2.1.1 shows the ASM62XX execution flow.  
Error  
message  
Fig. 2.1.1 ASM62XX execution flow  
2.2 ASM62XX Input/Output Files  
ASM62XX reads a source file, assembles it, and outputs object files and an assembly listing file.  
Source file (C2XXYYY.DAT)  
This is a source program file produced using an editor such as EDLIN. The file name format is  
C2XXYYY, and the file name must not exceed seven characters in length. Character string YYY should  
be determined by referencing the device name specified by Seiko Epson. The file extension must be  
added ".DAT".  
Object file (C2XXYYYH.HEX, C2XXYYYL.HEX)  
This is an assembled program file in Intel hex format. Because the machine code of the S1C62XXX is 12-  
bit, the high-order bytes (bits 9 to 12 suffixed by high-order bits 0000B) are output to file  
C2XXYYYH.HEX, and the low-order bytes (bits 8 to 1) are output to file C2XXYYYL.HEX.  
Assembly listing file (C2XXYYY.PRN)  
This is a program listing file generated by adding an operation codes and error messages (if any errors  
have occurred) to respective source program statements. A cross-reference table is generated at the end  
of the file, depending on the label table and options. The file name is C2XXYYY.PRN.  
See the Appendix for the contents of each file.  
III-2  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
3 ASM62XX OPERATION PROCEDURE  
This section explains how to operate ASM62XX.  
3.1 Starting ASM62XX  
When starting ASM62XX, enter the following at DOS command level (when a prompt such as A> is being  
displayed):  
_ indicates a blank.  
A parameter enclosed by [ ]  
can be omitted.  
ASM62XX _ [drive-name:] source-file-name [.shp] _ [-N]  
indicates the return key.  
When starting ASM62XX through the DMS6200, selects the "ASM62XX.EXE" and source file in the menu  
screen, and input options necessary.  
Drive name  
If the source file is not on the same disk as ASM62XX.EXE, specify a disk drive mounted the floppy disk  
storing the source file before input the source file name. If the source file is on the same disk as  
ASM62XX.EXE, it does not need to specify the disk drive.  
Source file name  
This is the name of the source file to be entered for ASM62XX. The source file name must not exceed  
seven characters in length. File extension .DAT must not be entered.  
.shp  
Characters s, h, and p are options for specifying the file I/ O drives, and can be omitted.  
s: Specifies the drive from which the source file is to be input. A character from A to P can be  
specified. If @ is specified, the source file in the current drive (directory) is input. Even if a drive  
name is prefixed to the source file name, this option is effective.  
h: Specifies the drive to which the object file (HEX) is to be output. A character from A to P can be  
specified. If @ is specified, the object file is output to the current drive (directory). If Z is  
specified, only assembly is executed; the object file is not generated.  
p: Specifies the drive to which the assembly listing file is to be output. A character from A to P can  
be specified. If @ is specified, the object file is output to the current drive (directory). If X is  
specified, a listing containing error messages is output to the console. If Z is specified, the  
assembly listing file is not generated.  
Characters s, h, p must all be specified; only one or two of them is not sufficient.  
-N option  
The code (FFH) in the undefined area of program memory is not created.  
Note The program data to be provided does not use the "-N" option. The FFH data should be inserted into  
the undefined program area.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
III-3  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
Example 1: Basic assembly example  
The source file "C2XXYYY.DAT" is input from drive A, and the  
object files "C2XXYYYH.HEX" and "C2XXYYYL.HEX" and  
the assembly listing file "C2XXYYY.PRN" are output to drive A.  
A>ASM62XX C2XXYYY  
The source file "C2XXYYY.DAT" is input from drive B, and the  
object files "C2XXYYYH.HEX" and "C2XXYYYL.HEX" and  
the assembly listing file "C2XXYYY.PRN" are output to drive B.  
A>ASM62XX B:C2XXYYY  
The source file "C2XXYYY.DAT" is input from drive B, and the  
object files "C2XXYYYH.HEX" and "C2XXYYYL.HEX" are  
output to drive B. The assembly listing file is not generated.  
A>ASM62XX C2XXYYY.BBZ  
Example 2: -N option use  
No undefined program area is generated in the created object files  
(C2XXYYYH.HEX, C2XXYYYL.HEX).  
Refer to APPENDIX, "ASM62XX EXECUTION EXAMPLE".  
A>ASM62XX C2XXYYY -N  
In this case, FFH data is inserted into the undefined program area  
of the object files.  
A>ASM62XX C2XXYYY  
When ASM62XX is started, the following start-up message is displayed.  
Example: When assembling C2XX0A0.DAT  
A>ASM62XX C2XX0A0  
*** E0C62XX CROSS ASSEMBLER. --- Ver 2.00 ***  
EEEEEEEEEE PPPPPPPP  
EEEEEEEEEE PPPPPPPPPP  
SSSSSSS  
OOOOOOOO  
OOO OOO  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
SSS SSSS  
NNNN  
EEE  
EEE  
PPP  
PPP  
PPP SSS  
PPP SSS  
SSSSSS  
SSSS  
SSS  
SSS OOO  
OOO NNNNN NNN  
OOO NNNNNN NNN  
OOO NNN NNN NNN  
OOO NNN NNNNNN  
OOO NNN NNNNN  
OOO  
EEEEEEEEEE PPPPPPPPPP  
EEEEEEEEEE PPPPPPPP  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
EEE  
EEE  
PPP  
PPP  
SSS  
SSS OOO  
OOO NNN  
NNNN  
NNN  
NN  
EEEEEEEEEE PPP  
EEEEEEEEEE PPP  
SSSS SSS  
SSSSSSS  
OOO  
OOO  
NNN  
NNN  
OOOOOOOO  
(C) COPYRIGHT 1991 SEIKO EPSON CORP.  
SOURCE FILE NAME IS " C2XXYYY.DAT "  
THIS SOFTWARE MAKES NEXT FILES.  
C2XXYYYH.HEX ... HIGH BYTE OBJECT FILE.  
C2XXYYYL.HEX ... LOW BYTE OBJECT FILE.  
C2XXYYY .PRN ... ASSEMBLY LIST FILE.  
III-4  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
3.2 Selecting Auto-Page-Set Function  
After the start-up message, the following message is displayed, prompting the user to select the auto-page-  
set function.  
DO YOU NEED AUTO PAGE SET?(Y/N)  
Press the "Y" key if selecting the auto-page-set function, or the "N" key if not selecting it. At this stage, the  
user can also return to the DOS command level by entering "CTRL" + "C" key.  
Auto-page-set function  
When the program branches to another page through a branch instruction such as JP, the branch-  
destination page must be set using the PSET instruction before executing the branch instruction.  
The auto-page-set function automatically inserts this PSET instruction. It checks whether the branch  
instruction page is the same as the branch-destination one. If the page is different, the function inserts  
the "PSET" instruction. If the page is the same, the function performs no operation.  
Therefore, do not select the auto-page-set function if "PSET" instructions have been correctly included  
in the source file.  
Note When auto-page-set is selected, there are restricted items related to source programming. See  
"4.3.1 Label".  
3.3 Generating a Cross-Reference Table  
After the auto-page-set function has been selected, the following message is output, prompting the user to  
select cross-reference table generation.  
DO YOU NEED CROSS REFERENCE TABLE?(Y/N)  
Press the "Y" key if generating the cross-reference table, or the "N" key if not generating it. At this stage,  
the user can also return to DOS command level by entering "CTRL" + "C" key.  
Note If the assembly listing file output destination (p option) is specified as Z (listing not generated) at the  
start of ASM62XX, the above message is not output and the cross-reference table is not generated.  
Cross-reference table  
The cross-reference table lists the symbols and their locations in the source file, and is output at the end  
of the assembly listing file in the following format:  
CROSS REFERENCE TABLE PAGE X- 1  
LABEL1 4#  
LABEL2 15#  
29  
40  
:
36  
....  
:
:
Symbol  
Number of the program statement  
(# indicates the number of the statement at which the symbol was defined)  
This table should be referenced during debugging. An error such as duplicate definition of a symbol can  
be easily detected.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
III-5  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
4 SOURCE FILE FORMAT  
The source file contains the source program consisting of S1C62XXX instructions (mnemonics) and  
pseudo-instructions, and is produced using an editor such as EDLIN.  
Refer to the "S1C6200/ 6200A Core CPU Manual" and the "S1C6xxx Technical Manual (Software)" for  
instruction sets.  
4.1 Source File Name  
A desired file name not exceeding seven characters in length can be assigned to each source file. The  
format must be as follows:  
C2XXYYY.DAT  
"YYY" of the "C2XXYYY.DAT" is an alphanumeric character string of up to three characters, and should be  
determined by referencing the device name specified by Seiko Epson. The file extension must be ".DAT".  
4.2 Statements  
Each source program statement must be written using the following format.  
Basic format: <Index>[:]  
<Instruction> <Expression> <; comment>  
Example:  
ON  
EQU  
ORG  
JP  
1
100H  
INIT  
START:  
;To init.  
Label  
field  
Mnemonic  
field  
Operand  
field  
Comment  
field  
A statement consists of four fields: label, mnemonic, operand, and comment. Up to 132 characters can be  
used for one statement. Fields must be delimited by one or more blanks or tabs.  
The label and comment fields are optional. Blank lines consisting only of a carriage return (CR) code are  
also allowed.  
Although each statement and field (excluding the label field) can begin at any desired column. The  
program becomes easier to understand if the heads of corresponding fields are aligned.  
4.2.1 Label field  
The label field can contain a label for referencing the memory address, a symbol that defines a constant, or  
a macro name. This field can be omitted if the statement name is not required. The label field must begin  
at column 1 and satisfy the following conditions.  
• The length must not exceed 14 characters.  
• The same name as a mnemonic or register name must not be used.  
• The following alphanumeric characters can be used, but the first character must not be a digit:  
A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, _ , ?  
• The uppercase and lowercase forms of a letter are equivalent.  
• ??nnnn (n is a digit) cannot be used as a name.  
A colon ":" can be used as a delimiter between a label field and the mnemonic field. If a colon is used,  
neither blanks nor tabs need to be written subsequently.  
Statements consisting of only a label field are also allowed.  
III-6  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
4.2.2 Mnemonic field  
The mnemonic field is used for an instruction mnemonic or a pseudo-instruction.  
4.2.3 Operand field  
The operand field is used for the operands of the instruction. The form of each operand and the number of  
operands depend on the kind of instruction. The form of expressions specifying values must be one of the  
following:  
• A numeric constant, a character constant, or a symbol that defines a constant  
• A label indicating a memory address  
• An operational expression for obtaining the specified value  
If the operand consists of two or more expressions, the expressions must be separated by commas ",".  
4.2.4 Comment field  
The comment field is used for comment data such as program headers and descriptions of processing. The  
contents of this field do not affect assembly or the object files generated by assembly.  
The part of the statement from a semicolon ";" to the CR code at the end of the statement is considered to be  
the comment field. Statements consisting of only a comment field are also allowed. When a comment  
spans multiple lines, a semicolon must be written at the beginning of each line.  
4.3 Index  
ASM62XX allows values to be referenced by their indexes.  
Refer to Section 4.2.1, "Label field", for the restrictions on index descriptions.  
4.3.1 Label  
A label is an index for referencing a location in the program, and can be used as an operand that specifies a  
memory address as immediate data in an instruction. For example, a label can be used as the operand of  
an instruction such as JP by writing the label in the branch-destination statement.  
The name written in the label field of an EQU or SET instruction is considered to be a symbol, not a label.  
Example:  
:
JP NZ,LABEL1  
:
:
LABEL1: LD A,0  
A label can be assigned to any statement, but the label assigned to the following pseudo-instructions is  
ignored:  
ORG, BANK, PAGE, SECTION, END, LABEL, ENDM  
Note When selecting the auto-page-set function (see Section 3.2), a statement consisting of only a label  
must be written immediately before the JP or CALL instructions.  
Example:  
PGSET:  
JP LABEL  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
III-7  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
4.3.2 Symbol  
A symbol is an index that indicates a numeric or character constant, and must be defined before its value is  
referenced (usually at the beginning of the program). The defined symbol can be used as the operand that  
specifies immediate data in an instruction.  
Example:  
ON EQU 1  
OFF EQU 0  
:
(See Section 4.5 for EQU.)  
LD A,ON  
; = LD A,1  
; = LD A,0  
:
LD A,OFF  
:
4.4 Constant and Operational Expression  
This section explains the immediate data description formats.  
4.4.1 Numeric constant  
A numeric constant is processed as a 13-bit value by ASM62XX. If a numeric constant greater than 13 bits  
is written, bit 13 and subsequent high-order bits are ignored.  
Note that the number of actual significant bits depends on the operand of each instruction. If the value of a  
constant is greater than the value that can be accommodated by the actual number of significant digits, an  
error occurs.  
Example:  
ABC EQU 0FFFFH  
LD A,65535  
ABC is defined as 1FFFH.  
An error occurs because it exceeds the significant digit  
count (4 bits).  
The default radix is decimal. The radix description formats are as follows:  
Binary numeral:  
Octal numeral:  
Decimal numeral:  
A numeral suffixed with B, such as 1010B (=10) or 01100100B (=100).  
A numeral suffixed with O or Q, such as 012O (=10) or 144Q (=100).  
A numeral alone or a numeral suffixed with D, such as 10 or 100D (=100).  
Hexadecimal numeral: A numeral suffixed with H, such as 0AH (=10) or 64H (=100).  
If the value begins with a letter from A to F, it must be prefixed with 0 to distinguish  
it from a name.  
4.4.2 Character constant  
A character constant is one or two ASCII characters enclosed by apostrophes (' '). A single ASCII character  
is processed as eight-bit data. If two or more ASCII characters are written, only the last two characters are  
significant as 13-bit data.  
Examples:  
'A'(=41H), 'BC'(=0243H), 'PQ'(=1051H), 'DEFGH''GH'(=0748H; DEF is ignored.)  
The apostrophe itself cannot be processed as a character constant, so it must be written as a numeric  
constant, such as 27H or 39.  
III-8  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
4.4.3 Operator  
When specifying a value for an item such as an operand, an operational expression can be written instead  
of a constant, and its result can be used as the value.  
Labels and symbols as well as constants can be used as terms in expressions. These values are processed as  
13-bit data (bit 14 and subsequent high-order bits are ignored); the operation result also consists of 13 bits.  
If the result exceeds the number of significant digits of the instruction operand, an error occurs.  
There are three types of operator—arithmetic, logical, and relational—as listed below (a and b represent  
terms, and _ represents one or more blanks).  
Arithmetic operators  
There are 11 arithmetic operators including the ones for addition, subtraction, multiplication, division,  
bit shifting, and bit separation.  
+a  
Monadic positive (indicates the subsequent value is positive)  
Monadic negative (indicates the subsequent value is negative)  
Addition (unsigned)  
-a  
a+b  
a-b  
Subtraction (unsigned)  
a*b  
Multiplication (unsigned)  
a/b  
Division (unsigned)  
a_MOD_b  
a_SHL_b  
Remainder of a/ b  
Shifts a b bits to the left. [b7<<<<<<b1]0  
Example: 00000011B SHL 2 00001100B  
a_SHR_b  
HIGH_a  
LOW_a  
Shifts a b bits to the right. 0[b7>>>>>>b0]→  
Example: 11000011B SHR 2 00110000B  
Separates the high-order eight bits from a (13 bits).  
Example: HIGH 1234H 12H  
Separates the low-order eight bits from a (13 bits).  
Example: LOW 1234H 34H  
Logical operators  
There are four logical operators as listed below. The logical operator returns the result of logical  
operation on the specified terms.  
a_AND_b  
a_OR_b  
a_XOR_b  
NOT_a  
Logical product  
Example: 00001111B AND 00000011B 00000011B  
Logical sum  
Example: 00001111B OR 11110000B 11111111B  
Exclusive logical sum  
Example: 00001111B XOR 00000011B 00001100B  
Logical negation  
Example: NOT 00001111B 11110000B  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
III-9  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
Relational operators  
A logical operator compares two terms; if the relationship between the terms is as the operator  
specifies, 1FFFH (true) is returned; if not, 0 (false) is returned.  
a_EQ_b  
a_NE_b  
a_LT_b  
a_LE_b  
a_GT_b  
a_GE_b  
True when a is equal to b  
True when a is not equal to b  
True when a is less than b  
True when a is less than or equal to b  
True when a is greater than b  
True when a is greater than or equal to b  
Be sure to insert one or more blanks for symbol "_" between terms. All operators must be entered in  
uppercase letters.  
An expression can contain one or more operators and pairs of parenthesis. In this case, operators are  
basically evaluated from left to right. However, an operation stipulated by an operator with higher priority  
or by parentheses is executed earlier. Every left parenthesis must have a corresponding right parenthesis.  
The following table shows the priority of operators.  
Operator  
Priority  
Examples: Operational expressions (ABC = 1, BCD = 3)  
)
Low  
:
OR, XOR  
AND  
EQ, NE, LT, LE, GT, GE  
+ (addition), - (subtraction)  
*, /, MOD, SHL, SHR  
(
LD A,BCD*(ABC+1) ;A-register <- 6  
LD A,ABC LT BCD  
;A-register <- 0FH (1111B)  
OR B,ABC SHL BCD ;Set bit 3 in B-register  
;(=OR B,1000B)  
AND B,ABC SHL BCD XOR 0FH  
;Reset bit 3 in B-register  
;(=AND B,0111B)  
HIGH, LOW, NOT  
- (monadic negative), + (monadic positive)  
:
High  
4.4.4 Location counter  
The start address of each instruction code is set in the location counter when a statement is assembled. A  
label or $ can be used when referencing the location counter value in a program.  
Location counter  
The location counter consists of 13 bits: one bit for the bank field, four bits for the page counter field,  
and eight bits for the step counter field.  
Bank  
Page counter  
10  
Step counter  
Bit  
12  
11  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Contents Bank  
Page address  
PCP  
Step address  
PCS  
BNK  
Example:  
Location counter  
(BNK) (PCP) (PCS)  
0
1 02  
JP $+3  
The location counter indicates the start address of the JP instruction, and the PCS value (02) is assigned to $.  
Consequently, the statement is assembled as "JP 5", and the program sequence jumps to the location three  
steps before (PCS=05) when it is executed.  
III-10  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
4.5 Pseudo-Instructions  
There are four types of pseudo-instruction: data definition, memory setting, assembler control, and macro.  
These pseudo-instructions as well as operational expressions can be used to govern assembly, and are not  
executed in the developed program.  
In the subsequent explanations, the items enclosed by < > in the pseudo-instruction format must be written  
in the statement (do not write the < > characters themselves). Symbol _ represents one or more blanks or  
tabs. One or more symbols and constants or an operational expression can be used in <expression>. See  
Section 4.6 for macro functions.  
4.5.1 Data definition pseudo-instructions  
There are three data definition pseudo-instructions: EQU, SET, and DW. The EQU and SET pseudo-  
instructions each define a symbol, and the DW pseudo-instruction presets data in program memory.  
EQU (Equate)  
<Symbol>_EQU_<Expression>  
To define a symbol  
The EQU pseudo-instruction defines <symbol> (written in the label field) as having the value of  
<expression> (written in the operand field).  
If a value greater than 13 bits is specified in <expression>, bit 14 and subsequent high-order bits are  
ignored.  
This definition must be made before the symbol is referenced in the program. A U-error occurs if an  
attempt is made to reference a symbol that has not been defined.  
The same symbol cannot be defined more than once. A P-error occurs if an attempt is made to define a  
symbol that has already been defined.  
Examples:  
ZERO EQU  
30H  
ONE  
ONE  
EQU  
EQU  
ZERO+1  
31H  
P-error because ONE has been defined more than twice  
FOUR EQU  
TWO*2  
U-error because TWO has not been defined  
SET  
<Symbol>_SET_<Expression>  
To define a symbol  
Like EQU, the SET pseudo-instruction defines the value of <symbol> as being <expression>. The SET  
pseudo-instruction allows a symbol to be redefined.  
Examples:  
ZERO EQU  
30H  
1
BIT  
BIT  
BIT  
SET  
:
SET  
:
2
Redefinition possible  
SET  
BIT SHL 1Previously-defined items can be referenced  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
III-11  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
DW (Define Word)  
<Label>_DW_<Expression>  
To preset data  
The DW pseudo-instruction assigns the value of <expression> (the low-order 12 bits when the value is  
greater than 12 bits) to the current memory location, indicated by the location counter.  
Examples:  
Location counter  
(BNK) (PCP) (PCS)  
0
0
0
2 0A  
2 0B  
2 0C  
TABLE DW 141H ; = RETD 'A'  
DW 142H ; = RETD 'B'  
DW 143H ; = RETD 'C'  
:
<label> can be omitted.  
4.5.2 Memory setting pseudo-instructions  
The program memory mounted at the S1C62XXX is divided into 256-step pages. Memory management  
(including the setting of the program location and page boundaries) during program generation must be  
controlled by the source program.  
The memory setting pseudo-instructions are used to specify memory management. The assembler sets the  
location counter according to these pseudo-instructions.  
If a memory area that has already been used is specified or a statement that exceeds the page is used  
without specifying that the statement is to exceed the page, the assembler displays an exclamation mark "!",  
indicating a warning, and ignores all subsequent statements until the next correct statement. This should  
be taken into account.  
When using the auto-page-set function, the space for insertion of the "PSET" pseudo-instruction must be  
allocated in each page.  
ORG (Origin)  
ORG_<Expression>  
To set the location counter  
The ORG pseudo-instruction sets the location counter to the value of <expression>.  
If the ORG pseudo-instruction is not written at the beginning of the program, the location counter is set  
to 0 (BNK=0, PCP=0, PCS=0) and assembly is started.  
The ORG pseudo-instruction can be used at multiple locations in the program. However, it cannot be  
used to set the location to a value before the current location. If this is attempted, an exclamation mark  
"!", indicating a warning, is displayed, and all subsequent statements until the next correct statement are  
ignored.  
A label can be written before the ORG statement, but it cannot be referenced because it is not cataloged  
in the label table. In this case, write the label in the statement following the ORG pseudo-instruction.  
Example:  
ORG 0100H ; BNK=0, PCP=1, PCS=00H  
:
START  
An R-error occurs if a value is specified exceeding the ROM capacity.  
Note The upper limit of program memory depends on the model. (Refer to the "S5U1C62xxxD  
Manual".)  
III-12  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
BANK  
BANK_<Expression>  
To set the bank (BNK)  
The BANK pseudo-instruction sets the value of <expression> in the bank (BNK) field, and sets the page  
counter (PCP) and step counter (PCS) to 00H.  
The BANK pseudo-instruction can be written at multiple locations in the program. However, it cannot  
be used to specify the current bank (excluding the specification in page 00, step 00) or a previous bank.  
If it is used to specify the current bank or a previous bank, an exclamation mark "!", indicating a  
warning, is displayed, and all subsequent statements until the next correct statement are ignored.  
A label can be written before the BANK statement, but it cannot be referenced because it is not  
cataloged in the label table. In this case, write the label in the statement after the BANK pseudo-  
instruction.  
PAGE  
PAGE_<Expression>  
To set the page counter (PCP)  
The PAGE pseudo-instruction sets the value of <expression> in the page counter (PCP) and sets the  
step counter (PCS) to 00H.  
The PAGE pseudo-instruction can be written at multiple locations in the program. However, it cannot  
be used to specify the current page (excluding the specification in step 00) or a previous page. If it is  
used to specify the current page or a previous page, an exclamation mark "!", indicating a warning, is  
displayed, and all subsequent statements until the next correct statement are ignored.  
A label can be written before the PAGE statement, but it cannot be referenced because it is not  
cataloged in the label table. In this case, write the label in the statement after the PAGE pseudo-  
instruction.  
Example:  
Location counter  
(BNK) (PCP) (PCS)  
:
0
0
:
0
:
:
:
:
0 1AH  
0 1BH  
LD X,0  
LD Y,0  
:
:
:
:
0 F0H  
JP xxx  
PAGE 2  
Ineffective because a previous page  
was specified  
0
0
:
2 00H SUB1: LD A,MX  
2 01H LD B,MY  
:
:
:
:
PAGE 1  
SUB2: LD A,MX  
LD B,MY  
!
!
Effective  
:
:
PAGE 3  
3 00H SUB3: LD A,0  
3 01H LD B,1  
0
0
:
:
:
:
:
An R-error occurs if a value is specified that exceeds the last page.  
Note The last page depends on the model. (Refer to the "S5U1C62xxxD Manual".)  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
III-13  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
SECTION  
SECTION  
To change the section  
The SECTION pseudo-instruction sets the first address of the subsequent section in the location coun-  
ter. Sections are 16-step areas starting from the beginning of the program memory.  
(BNK) (PCP) (PCS)  
0
0
0
:
0
0
0
:
0
1 00H  
1 10H  
1 20H  
Section 1  
Section 2  
16 steps  
:
:
:
:
:
:
1 F0H  
2 00H  
2 20H  
Section 16  
Section 17  
:
:
3 F0H  
Section 48  
A SECTION pseudo-instruction written in the last section of the page not only clears the step counter  
but also updates the page counter, so a new page need not be specified.  
A label can be written before the SECTION pseudo-instruction, but it cannot be referenced because it is  
not cataloged in the label table. In this case, write the label in the statement following the SECTION  
pseudo-instruction.  
Example:  
Location counter  
(BNK) (PCP) (PCS)  
:
0
0
0
0
:
:
:
:
1 09H  
1 0AH  
1 0BH  
1 0CH  
JPBA  
LD  
X,0  
LD  
LD  
Y,0  
MX,4  
SECTION  
0
0
:
0
1 10H TABLE LD  
A,1  
A,1  
:
1 11H  
ADD  
:
:
:
1 FAH  
RET  
SECTION  
0
0
:
2 00H  
2 01H  
LOOP SCF  
ADD  
:
A,MY  
:
:
:
III-14  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
4.5.3 Assembler control pseudo-instructions  
END  
END  
To terminate assembly  
The END statement terminates assembly. All statements following the END statement are ignored. Be  
sure to write this statement at the end of the program. If it is missing, assembly may not terminate.  
A label can be written before the END statement, but it cannot be referenced because it is not cataloged  
in the label table.  
4.6 Macro-Functions  
When using the same statement block at multiple locations in a program, the statement block can be called  
using a name defined beforehand. A statement block that has been so defined is called a macro.  
Unlike a subroutine, the statement block is expanded at all locations where it is called, so the programmer  
should consider the statement block size and frequency of use and determine whether a macro or a subrou-  
tine is more appropriate.  
4.6.1 Macro-instructions  
ASM62XX provides the macro-  
instructions listed below so that  
branching between pages is possible  
without specifying the destination  
page using the PSET instruction.  
Code  
Macro-  
instruction  
Mnemonic  
after expansion  
11 10  
9
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
8
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
JPM  
ps  
PSET p  
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
p4 p3 p2 p1 p0  
JP  
s
s7 s6 s5 s4 s3 s2 s1 s0  
p4 p3 p2 p1 p0  
s7 s6 s5 s4 s3 s2 s1 s0  
p4 p3 p2 p1 p0  
s7 s6 s5 s4 s3 s2 s1 s0  
p4 p3 p2 p1 p0  
s7 s6 s5 s4 s3 s2 s1 s0  
p4 p3 p2 p1 p0  
s7 s6 s5 s4 s3 s2 s1 s0  
p4 p3 p2 p1 p0  
JPM  
C,ps PSET p  
0
1
0
JP  
C,s  
Character string ps represents 13-bit  
immediate data that indicates the  
branch-destination address. A label  
can be used for it.  
JPM  
NC,ps PSWT p  
0
1
0
JP  
NC,s 0  
JPM  
Z,ps PSET p  
1
0
1
0
1
0
JP  
Z,s  
JPM  
NZ,ps PSET p  
0
1
0
JP  
NZ,s 0  
CALLM ps  
PSET p  
CALL s  
1
0
0
1
0
s7 s6 s5 s4 s3 s2 s1 s0  
Example:  
Source file  
:
JPM  
:
LABEL2  
PAGE  
LABEL2 LD  
:
2
A,0  
Assembly list file after expansion  
:
JPM  
LABEL2  
+
+
PSET LABEL2  
JP  
LABEL2  
:
PAGE  
LABEL2 LD  
2
A,0  
:
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
III-15  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
4.6.2 Macro-definitions  
The macro-definition should be done by using the MACRO and the ENDM instructions (pseudo-instruc-  
tion).  
MACRO ~ ENDM  
<Macro-name>_MACRO_[<Dummy-argument>, ...]  
Statement  
:
ENDM  
The statement block enclosed by a MACRO pseudo-instruction and an ENDM pseudo-instruction is  
defined as a macro. Any name can be assigned to the macro as long as it conforms to the rules regard-  
ing the characters, length, and label field.  
A macro can have an argument passed to it when it is called. In this case, any symbol can be used as a  
dummy argument in the macro definition where the actual argument is to be substituted and the same  
symbol must be written after the MACRO pseudo-instruction. Multiple dummy arguments must be  
separated by commas (,).  
Be sure to write the ENDM statement at the end of a macro-definition.  
Example: This macro loads data from the memory location specified by ADDR into the A or B register specified  
by REG. Sample call: LDM A,10H  
LDM MACRO REG,ADDR  
LD  
X,ADDR  
REG,MX  
LD  
ENDM  
These dummy arguments are replaced by actual arguments when the macro is expanded.  
LOCAL  
If a macro having a label is expanded at multiple locations, the label duplicates, causing an error. The  
LOCAL pseudo-instruction prevents this error occurring.  
LOCAL_<Label-name>[,<Label-name>...]  
The label specified by the LOCAL pseudo-instruction is replaced by "??nnnn" when the macro is  
expanded. Field nnnn is a four-digit decimal field, to which values 0001 to 9999 are assigned  
sequentially.  
The LOCAL pseudo-instruction must be written at the beginning of the macro. The LOCAL pseudo-  
instruction is ignored if another instruction precedes it.  
Example:  
WAIT MACRO CNT  
LOCAL LOOP  
LD  
LOOP SBC  
JP  
A,CNT  
A,1  
NZ,LOOP  
Replaces LOOP with ??nnnn at expansion.  
ENDM  
III-16  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
4.6.3 Macro-calls  
The defined macro-name can be called from any location in the program by using the following format:  
[<Label>]_<Macro-name>_ [<Actual-argument>, ...]  
The MACRO can be called by using the macro-name.  
When arguments are required, write actual arguments corresponding to the dummy arguments used in the  
macro-definition. Multiple actual arguments must be separated by commas (,).  
Actual and dummy arguments correspond sequentially from left to right. If the number of actual argu-  
ments is greater than the number of dummy arguments, the excess actual arguments are ignored. If the  
number of actual arguments is less than the number of dummy arguments, the excess dummy arguments  
are replaced by nulls (00H).  
Any label can be written before the macro-name.  
Example:  
Source file  
ORG  
0200H  
CTAS  
CTAE  
EQU  
EQU  
00H  
02H  
CAFSET EQU  
CAFRST EQU  
0101B  
0000B  
10H  
08H  
0001B  
0100B  
CTBS  
CTBE  
CBFSET EQU  
CBFRST EQU  
EQU  
EQU  
COUNT MACRO FSET,FRST,CTS,CTE  
LOCAL LOOP1  
SET  
F,FSET  
F,FRST  
A,0  
RST  
LD  
LD  
X,CTS  
MX,A  
LOOP1 ACPX  
CP  
XL,CTE  
NZ,LOOP1  
JP  
ENDM  
COUNTA COUNT CAFSET,CAFRST,CTAS,CTAE  
RET  
COUNTB COUNT CBFSET,CBFRST,CTBS,CTBE  
RET  
END  
The assembly listing file after assembly is shown on the next page.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
III-17  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
Assembly listing file  
LISTING OF ASM62XX  
C2XX0A1.PRN ........ PAGE 1  
LINE BANK PCP PCS  
OBJ  
SOURCE STATEMENT  
1
2
ORG  
0200H  
3
0000=  
0002=  
0005=  
0000=  
0010=  
0008=  
0001=  
0004=  
CTAS  
CTAE  
EQU  
EQU  
00H  
4
02H  
5
CAFSET EQU  
CAFRST EQU  
0101B  
0000B  
10H  
08H  
0001B  
0100B  
6
7
CTBS  
CTBE  
CBFSET EQU  
CBFRST EQU  
EQU  
EQU  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
COUNT MACRO FSET,FRST,CTS,CTE  
LOCAL LOOP1  
SET  
F,FSET  
F,FRST  
A,0  
RST  
LD  
LD  
X,CTS  
MX,A  
LOOP1 ACPX  
CP  
XL,CTE  
NZ,LOOP1  
JP  
ENDM  
COUNTA COUNT CAFSET,CAFRST,CTAS,CTAE  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
0 2 00  
0 2 01  
0 2 02  
0 2 03  
0 2 04  
0 2 05  
0 2 06  
0 2 07  
F45  
F50  
E00  
B00  
F28  
A52  
704  
FDF  
+
+
+
+
SET  
RST  
LD  
F,CAFSET  
F,CAFRST  
A,0  
LD  
X,CTAS  
MX,A  
+ ??0001 ACPX  
+
+
CP  
XL,CTAE  
NZ,??0001  
JP  
RET  
COUNTB COUNT CBFSET,CBFRST,CTBS,CTBE  
0 2 08  
0 2 09  
0 2 0A  
0 2 0B  
0 2 0C  
0 2 0D  
0 2 0E  
0 2 0F  
F41  
F54  
E00  
B10  
F28  
A58  
70C  
FDF  
+
+
+
+
SET  
RST  
LD  
F,CBFSET  
F,CBFRST  
A,0  
X,CTBS  
MX,A  
XL,CTBE  
NZ,??0002  
LD  
+ ??0002 ACPX  
+
+
CP  
JP  
RET  
END  
III-18  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
5 ERROR MESSAGES  
If an error occurs during assembly, ASM62XX outputs the appropriate error symbol or error  
message listed below to the console and assembly listing file.  
Only a single error symbol is output at the beginning (column 1) of the statement that caused the error. (If  
two or more errors occurred, only the error with highest priority is output.)  
The following error symbols are listed in order of priority, starting with the one with the highest priority.  
S (Syntax Error) ............................................. An unrecoverable syntax error was encountered.  
U (Undefined Error) ...................................... The label or symbol of the operand has not been defined.  
M (Missing Label) .......................................... The label field has been omitted.  
O (Operand Error) ......................................... A syntax error was encountered in the operand, or the operand  
could not be evaluated.  
P (Phase Error) ............................................... The same label or symbol was defined more than once.  
R (Range Error) .............................................. • The location counter value exceeded the upper limit of the  
program memory, or a location exceeding the upper limit was  
specified.  
• A value greater than that which the number of significant  
digits of the operand will accommodate was specified.  
! (Warning) ..................................................... • Memory areas overlapped because of a "PAGE" or "ORG"  
pseudo-instruction or both.  
• A statement exceeded a page boundary although its location  
was not specified.  
FILE NAME ERROR................................. The source file name was longer than 8 characters.  
FILE NOT PRESENT................................ The specified source file was not found.  
DIRECTORY FULL ................................... No space was left in the directory of the specified disk.  
FATAL DISK WRITE ERROR............... The file could not be written to the disk.  
LABEL TABLE OVERFLOW ................ The number of defined labels and symbols exceeded the label  
table capacity (4000).  
CROSS REFERENCE TABLE OVERFLOW  
........... The label/ symbol reference count exceeded the cross- reference  
table capacity (only when the cross-reference table is generated).  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
III-19  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
APPENDIX ASM62XX EXECUTION EXAMPLE  
1) Source file (C2XX0A0.DAT)  
A>TYPE C2XX0A0.DAT  
;
;*******<< SAMPLE PROGRAM :E0C62XX >>*******  
;
ABC  
TEN  
;
EQU  
EQU  
0F0H  
10  
START LD  
A,0  
LD  
LD  
X,8  
Y,3  
LDPX  
;
A,MX  
ORG  
;
0E0H  
NEXT  
LD  
ADD  
B,TEN  
MX,XH  
A,101B  
MY,A  
AND  
FAN  
RCF  
SCPX  
JP  
MX,B  
C,NEXT  
;
;-------<<  
ERROR  
>>-------  
EQU  
0CH-2  
4
ERROR EQU  
ERROR LD  
A,3  
SBD  
INC  
JP  
ORG  
NOP5  
SECTION  
ORG  
MX,A  
Z
UNDEF  
11100000B  
ABC+0FH  
NOP7  
NOP7  
END  
III-20  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
2) Running the assembler (display on the console)  
A>ASM62XX C2XX0A0  
*** E0C62XX CROSS ASSEMBLER. --- VERSION 2.00 ***  
EEEEEEEEEE PPPPPPPP  
EEEEEEEEEE PPPPPPPPPP  
SSSSSSS  
OOOOOOOO  
OOO OOO  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
SSS SSSS  
NNNN  
EEE  
EEE  
PPP  
PPP  
PPP SSS  
PPP SSS  
SSSSSS  
SSSS  
SSS  
SSS OOO  
OOO NNNNN NNN  
OOO NNNNNN NNN  
OOO NNN NNN NNN  
OOO NNN NNNNNN  
OOO NNN NNNNN  
OOO  
EEEEEEEEEE PPPPPPPPPP  
EEEEEEEEEE PPPPPPPP  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
EEE  
EEE  
PPP  
PPP  
SSS  
SSS OOO  
OOO NNN  
NNNN  
NNN  
NN  
EEEEEEEEEE PPP  
EEEEEEEEEE PPP  
SSSS SSS  
SSSSSSS  
OOO  
OOO  
NNN  
NNN  
OOOOOOOO  
(C) COPYRIGHT 1991 SEIKO EPSON CORP.  
SOURCE FILE NAME IS " C2XXYYY.DAT "  
THIS SOFTWARE MAKES NEXT FILES.  
C2XXYYYH.HEX ... HIGH BYTE OBJECT FILE.  
C2XXYYYL.HEX ... LOW BYTE OBJECT FILE.  
C2XXYYY .PRN ... ASSEMBLY LIST FILE.  
DO YOU NEED AUTO PAGE SET?(Y/N) N  
DO YOU NEED CROSS REFERENCE TABLE?(Y/N) Y  
M 23  
P 24  
P 25  
S 26  
O 27  
U 28  
! 30  
R 34  
000A=  
0004=  
E03  
EQU  
ERROR EQU  
ERROR LD  
SBD  
0CH-2  
4
0 0 E7  
0 0 E8  
0 0 E9  
0 0 EA  
A,3  
MX,A  
Z
FFF  
FFF  
000  
INC  
JP  
UNDEF  
NOP5  
0 1 00  
NOP7  
8 ERROR OR WARNING(S) DETECTED  
USED : 6/2000 SYMBOLS  
A>  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
III-21  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
3) Assembly listing file (C2XX0A0.PRN)  
A>TYPE C2XX0A0.PRN  
LISTING OF ASM62XX  
C2XX0A0.PRN ........ PAGE  
1
LINE BANK PCP PCS  
OBJ  
SOURCE STATEMENT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
;
;*******<< SAMPLE PROGRAM :E0C62XX >>*******  
;
00F0=  
000A=  
ABC  
TEN  
;
EQU  
EQU  
0F0H  
10  
0
0
0
0
0 00  
0 01  
0 02  
0 03  
E00  
B08  
803  
EE2  
START  
LD  
A,0  
X,8  
Y,3  
A,MX  
LD  
LD  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
LDPX  
;
ORG  
0E0H  
;
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 E0  
0 E1  
0 E2  
0 E3  
0 E4  
0 E5  
0 E6  
C1A  
EA6  
C85  
F1C  
F5E  
F39  
2E0  
NEXT  
ADD  
LD  
AND  
FAN  
RCF  
SCPX  
JP  
B,TEN  
MX,XH  
A,101B  
MY,A  
MX,B  
C,NEXT  
;
;-------<<  
ERROR  
>>-------  
M
P
P
S
O
U
000A=  
0004=  
E03  
EQU  
0CH-2  
4
A,3  
MX,A  
Z
ERROR  
ERROR  
EQU  
0
0
0
0
0 E7  
0 E8  
0 E9  
0 EA  
LD  
FFF  
SBD  
FFF  
INC  
000  
JP  
UNDEF  
11100000B  
ORG  
!
NOP5  
SECTION  
ORG  
NOP7  
NOP7  
END  
ABC+0FH  
0
0
0 FF  
1 00  
FFF  
R
8 ERROR OR WARNING(S) DETECTED  
LABEL TABLE  
PAGE L- 1  
ABC  
TEN  
=00F0  
=000A  
ERROR  
=0004  
NEXT  
0-0-E0  
START  
0-0-00  
U UNDEF  
0-0-00  
CROSS REFERENCE TABLE  
PAGE X- 1  
ABC  
ERROR 24#  
NEXT 14#  
START 7#  
TEN 5#  
UNDEF 28  
4#  
32  
25#  
20  
14  
III-22  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
CROSS ASSEMBLER ASM62XX  
4) Object files (C2XX0A0H.HEX, C2XX0A0L.HEX)  
A>TYPE C2XX0A0H.HEX  
A>TYPE C2XX0A0L.HEX  
:100000000E0B080EFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFCD  
:10001000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0  
:10002000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE0  
:10003000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFD0  
:10004000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC0  
:10005000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFB0  
:10006000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFA0  
:10007000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF90  
:10008000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF80  
:10009000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF70  
:1000A000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF60  
:1000B000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF50  
:1000C000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF40  
:1000D000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF30  
:1000E0000C0S1C0F0F0F020E0F0F00FFFFFFFFFF94  
:1000F000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0F00  
:10010000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF  
:10011000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFEF  
:10012000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFDF  
:10013000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFCF  
:10014000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFBF  
:10015000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFAF  
:10016000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF9F  
:10017000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF8F  
:10018000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF7F  
:10019000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF6F  
:1001A000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF5F  
:1001B000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF4F  
:1001C000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF3F  
:1001D000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF2F  
:1001E000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF1F  
:1001F000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0F  
:10020000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE  
:10021000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFEE  
:10022000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFDE  
:10023000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFCE  
:10024000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFBE  
:10025000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFAE  
:10026000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF9E  
:10027000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF8E  
:10028000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF7E  
:10029000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF6E  
:1002A000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF5E  
:1002B000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF4E  
:1002C000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF3E  
:1002D000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF2E  
:1002E000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF1E  
:1002F000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0E  
:10030000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFD  
:10031000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFED  
:10032000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFDD  
:10033000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFCD  
:10034000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFBD  
:10035000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFAD  
:10036000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF9D  
:10037000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF8D  
:10038000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF7D  
:10039000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF6D  
:1003A000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF5D  
:1003B000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF4D  
:1003C000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF3D  
:1003D000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF2D  
:1003E000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF1D  
:1003F000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0D  
:00000001FF  
:10000000000803E2FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0F  
:10001000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0  
:10002000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE0  
:10003000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFD0  
:10004000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC0  
:10005000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFB0  
:10006000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFA0  
:10007000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF90  
:10008000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF80  
:10009000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF70  
:1000A000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF60  
:1000B000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF50  
:1000C000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF40  
:1000D000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF30  
:1000E0001AA6851C5E39E003FFFF00FFFFFFFFFF3C  
:1000F000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF10  
:10010000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF  
:10011000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFEF  
:10012000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFDF  
:10013000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFCF  
:10014000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFBF  
:10015000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFAF  
:10016000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF9F  
:10017000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF8F  
:10018000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF7F  
:10019000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF6F  
:1001A000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF5F  
:1001B000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF4F  
:1001C000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF3F  
:1001D000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF2F  
:1001E000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF1F  
:1001F000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0F  
:10020000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE  
:10021000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFEE  
:10022000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFDE  
:10023000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFCE  
:10024000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFBE  
:10025000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFAE  
:10026000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF9E  
:10027000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF8E  
:10028000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF7E  
:10029000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF6E  
:1002A000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF5E  
:1002B000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF4E  
:1002C000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF3E  
:1002D000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF2E  
:1002E000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF1E  
:1002F000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0E  
:10030000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFD  
:10031000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFED  
:10032000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFDD  
:10033000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFCD  
:10034000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFBD  
:10035000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFAD  
:10036000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF9D  
:10037000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF8D  
:10038000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF7D  
:10039000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF6D  
:1003A000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF5D  
:1003B000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF4D  
:1003C000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF3D  
:1003D000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF2D  
:1003E000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF1D  
:1003F000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0D  
:00000001FF  
(When ROM capacity is in 1,024 steps)  
Note The size of the object file differs depending on the device and the ROM capacity. Refer to the  
"S5U1C62xxxD Manual".  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
III-23  
IV  
MELODY ASSEMBLER  
MLA628X  
This part mainly explains how to operate the  
Melody Assembler MLA628X for the  
S1C62 Family, and how to generate source  
files.  
MELODY ASSEMBLER MLA628X  
MELODY ASSEMBLER MLA628X  
Co nte nts  
1 DIFFERENCES DEPENDING ON THE MODEL __________________ IV-1  
2 MLA628X OUTLINE___________________________________________ IV-1  
2.1 Outline and Execution Flow .................................................................................. IV-1  
2.2 MLA628X Input/Output Files ................................................................................ IV-1  
3 STARTING MLA628X__________________________________________ IV-2  
4 FORMAT OF SOURCE FILE ___________________________________ IV-4  
4.1 Source File Name .................................................................................................. IV-4  
4.2 Statement (line)...................................................................................................... IV-4  
5 PSEUDO-INSTRUCTIONS _____________________________________ IV-6  
5.1 Address-Setting Pseudo-Instruction ...................................................................... IV-6  
5.2 Option-Setting Pseudo-Instructions ...................................................................... IV-6  
6 ERROR MESSAGES ___________________________________________ IV-7  
APPENDIX SAMPLE FILES _____________________________________ IV-8  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
IV-i  
MELODY ASSEMBLER MLA628X  
1 DIFFERENCES DEPENDING ON THE MODEL  
The MLA628X is not included in the software tools for models (other than the S1C62N8X) that do  
not have the melody function.  
The melody ROM capacity varies depending on the model in models (S1C62N8X) having the melody  
function. You should be aware that the number of melody data and their bit structure will vary, as a result.  
The limiting items for each model are indicated in the "S5U1C62N8xD Manual".  
2 MLA628X OUTLINE  
2.1 Outline and Execution Flow  
The Melody Assembler MLA628X is an assembler that  
outputs melody ROM data of the 4-bit single-chip micro-  
A>EDLIN C28XYYY.MDT  
Create the source file  
computers S1C628XX Series. MLA628X assembles the  
C28XYYY  
.MDT  
source file which has been input by the user's editor and  
outputs the object file in Intel-HEX format as well as the  
assembly list file and document file.  
Source file  
A>MLA628X C28XYYY  
The Melody Assembler's program name is  
"MLA628X.EXE".  
Execute the melody assembler  
Figure 2.1.1 shows the flow of executing MLA628X.  
Error  
message  
C28XYYY  
.MPR  
C28XYYYA  
.HEX  
C28XYYYA  
.DOC  
Fig. 2.1.1 MLA628X execution flow  
Melody  
assembly  
list file  
Melody  
Hex file  
Melody  
document file  
Error  
message  
for evaluation board use  
2.2 MLA628X Input/Output Files  
MLA628X inputs the source file, and after assembly it outputs the melody HEX file, assembly list file and  
document file.  
Source file (C28XYYY.MDT)  
This is a source program file of the melody data. Generate the source file using an editor such as  
EDLIN while referencing the Chapter 3.  
Melody HEX file (C28XYYYA.HEX)  
This is a melody data file (Intel hexa format) used for the evaluation board (S5U1C62N8xE). One  
melody ROM is generated by writing this file with the ROM writer.  
Also, this file can be loaded into the evaluation board through the ICE by using the OPTLD command.  
Note: Set all unused ROM areas to FFH when writing the HEX file into EPROM.  
When loaded with ICE, the file format is checked, and an error results when it outside the specifiable  
range is specified. Refer to the "S5U1C62N8xD Manual" for the restrictions of each models.  
Melody assembly list file (C28XYYY.MPR)  
Melody ROM list file with melody ROM data and error messages (if any) added to each line of the  
source file. The scale ROM table can be created at the end of the file.  
Melody document file (C28XYYYA.DOC)  
This is a data file used to generate the mask patterns. Combine the completed document file with the  
program files and option document files using the mask data checker MDC628X, and submit to Seiko  
Epson.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
IV-1  
MELODY ASSEMBLER MLA628X  
3 STARTING MLA628X  
To starting MLA628X, enter the following at the DOS command level (when a prompt such as A> is  
being displayed):  
_ indicates a blank.  
A parameter enclosed by [ ]  
can be omitted.  
MLA628X_[drive name:]source filename[.shp]_[-H]  
indicates the return key.  
When starting MLA628X through the DMS6200, selects the "MLA628X.EXE" and source file in the menu  
screen, and input options necessary.  
Drive name  
When the source file is in a different drive from MLA628X.MDT, the drive name is input before the  
source filename. If in the same drive, then it may be omitted.  
Source filename  
The source file to input to MLA628X.  
Note Make the source filename up to seven characters long, and do not input the extension (".MDT").  
.shp  
Characters s, h, and p are options specifying the file's input/ output drive, as explained below. These  
may be omitted, and input is valid for both upper- and lower-case.  
s: Specifies the drive from A through P that inputs the source file.  
When "@" is specified, the source file on the current drive (directory) is input.  
The "s" specification is valid when the drive name is input before the source filename.  
h: Specifies the drive from A through P that outputs the melody HEX file and melody document file.  
When "@" is specified, output is made to the current drive (directory).  
When "Z" is specified, only assembly is performed and the melody HEX file and melody document  
file are not created.  
p: Specifies the drive from A through P that outputs the assembly list file.  
When "@" is specified, output is made to the current drive (directory).  
When "X" is specified the list including error messages is output from the console.  
When "Z" is specified, the assembly list file is not created.  
Specify s, h and p at the same time. These cannot be specified separately.  
-H option  
"-H" is the option to indicate activation of the conversion program from the melody document file to the  
melody HEX file.  
When this option is specified, the [shp] option is disabled. The melody document file of the current  
drive is input and the melody HEX file is created for the current drive. Input can be in upper- and  
lower-case.  
IV-2  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
MELODY ASSEMBLER MLA628X  
Examples:  
A>MLA628X C28XYYY  
In this example, the source file "C28XYYY.MDT" is input from drive A, and the melody HEX file  
"C28XYYYA.HEX", melody assembly list file "C28XYYY.MPR", and melody document file  
"C28XYYYA.DOC" are created on drive A.  
A>MLA628X B:C28XYYY  
In this example, the source file "C28XYYY.MDT" is input from drive B, and the melody HEX file  
"C28XYYYA.HEX", melody assembly list file "C28XYYY.MPR", and melody document file  
"C28XYYYA.DOC" are created on drive B.  
A>MLA628X C28XYYY.BBZ  
In this example, the source file "C28XYYY.MDT" is input from drive B, and the melody HEX file  
"C28XYYYA.HEX" and melody document file "C28XYYYA.DOC" are created on drive B. The melody  
assembly list is not created.  
When MLA628X is activated, the activation messages appear as shown below.  
A>MLA628X C28X0A0  
Example:  
When assembling C28X0A0.MDT  
(Basic assembly)  
*** MLA628X MELODY ASSEMBLER. --- Ver 3.10 ***  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEE  
PPPPPPPP  
PPPPPPPPPP  
PPP  
PPP  
SSSSSSS  
SSS SSSS  
SSS SSS  
SSS  
SSSSSS  
SSSS  
SSS  
SSS  
SSS  
OOOOOOOO  
OOO OOO  
OOO OOO  
NNN  
NNNN  
NNNNN  
NNNNNN NNN  
NNN NNN NNN  
NNN NNNNNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
PPP  
PPP  
With the message "STRIKE ANY  
KEY", the program is requesting  
key input for confirmation.  
EEE  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEE  
PPPPPPPPPP  
PPPPPPPP  
PPP  
NNNNN  
NNNN  
NNN  
EEE  
PPP  
SSS  
SSSS  
The program will proceed when  
any key is pressed.  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEEEEEEEEE  
PPP  
PPP  
OOO  
OOO  
SSSSSSS  
OOOOOOOO  
NN  
To cancel the program, press the  
"CTRL" and "C" keys together. This  
will return you to the DOS com-  
mand level.  
(C) COPYRIGHT 1991 SEIKO EPSON CORP.  
SOURCE FILE NAME IS " C28XYYYA.MDT ".  
THIS SOFTWARE MAKES NEXT FILES.  
C28XYYYA.HEX ... MELODY HEX FILE.  
C28XYYYA.DOC ... MELODY DOCUMENT FILE.  
C28XYYY .MPR ... MELODY ASSEMBLY FILE.  
STRIKE ANY KEY  
A>MLA628X C28X0A0 -H  
*** MLA628X MELODY ASSEMBLER. --- Ver 3.10 ***  
Example:  
-H option use (activation of program  
to convert melody document file to  
melody HEX file)  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEE  
PPPPPPPP  
PPPPPPPPPP  
SSSSSSS  
SSS SSSS  
SSS SSS  
SSS  
SSSSSS  
SSSS  
SSS  
SSS  
SSS  
OOOOOOOO  
OOO OOO  
OOO OOO  
NNN  
NNNN  
NNNNN  
NNNNNN NNN  
NNN NNN NNN  
NNN NNNNNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
PPP  
PPP  
PPPPPPPPPP  
PPPPPPPP  
PPP  
PPP  
PPP  
PPP  
PPP  
PPP  
EEE  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEE  
EEE  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEEEEEEEEE  
With the message "STRIKE ANY  
KEY", the program is requesting  
key input for confirmation. Check  
the source filename and option that  
you have input.  
NNNNN  
NNNN  
NNN  
SSS  
SSSS  
OOO  
OOO  
SSSSSSS  
OOOOOOOO  
NN  
(C) COPYRIGHT 1991 SEIKO EPSON CORP.  
SOURCE FILE NAME IS " C28XYYYA.DOC ".  
THIS SOFTWARE MAKES NEXT FILES.  
The program will proceed when  
any key is pressed. To cancel the  
program, press the "CTRL" and "C"  
keys together. This will return you  
to the DOS command level.  
C28XYYYA.HEX ... MELODY HEX FILE.  
STRIKE ANY KEY  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
IV-3  
MELODY ASSEMBLER MLA628X  
4 FORMAT OF SOURCE FILE  
Contents of the source file, created with an editor such as EDLIN, are configured from the  
S1C628XX melody codes and the pseudo-instructions described later.  
4.1 Source File Name  
The source file can be named with a maximum of any seven characters. As a rule, keep to the following  
format.  
C28XYYY.MDT  
Three alphanumerics are entered in the "YYY" part. Refer to the model name from Seiko Epson. The  
extension must be ".MDT".  
4.2 Statement (line)  
Write each of the source file statements (lines) as follows:  
Basic format: <Attack>  
<Note>  
<Scale>  
<End bit>  
<; comment>  
Example:  
.TEMPC0=5  
.TEMPC1=8  
.OCTAVE=32  
;
1
:
0
:
1
:
6
:
C3  
:
A4#  
:
1
;1st Melody  
Attack field  
Note field  
Scale field  
End bit field Comment field  
The statement is made up of the five fields: attack field, note field, scale field, end bit field, and comment  
field. Up to 80 characters can be written in the statement. The fields are separated by one or more spaces  
or by inserting tabs.  
The end bit fields and comment fields can be filled in on an as-needed basis.  
A blank line is also permitted for the CR (carriage return) code only. However, it is not permitted on the  
last line. Each of the fields can be started from any column.  
(1) Attack field  
Control of the attack output is written.  
When "1" is written, attack output is performed. When "0" is written, attack output is not performed.  
(2) Note field  
Table 4.2.1 Notes and corresponding codes  
No.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
Eight notes can be specified with the 3 bits  
melody data. Fill in the note field with  
numbers from 1 to 8.  
Note  
Table 4.2.2 Rests and corresponding codes  
No.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
When the "RR" (rest) is described in scale  
field, the rest may be selected from among 8  
types as shown in Table 4.2.2.  
Rest  
IV-4  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
MELODY ASSEMBLER MLA628X  
(3) Scale field  
The scale field can be filled in with any scale (C3 through C6#).  
When inputting the scale data directly, prefix the data with "$". In this case, the input data range is 00H  
through FDH.  
Moreover, the rest may be selected by describes "RR" in the scale field.  
The number of specifiable scales varies depending on the model.  
(Refer to the "S5U1C62N8xD Manual".)  
(4) End bit field  
The instruction indicating the end of the melody is written in the end bit field. When "1" is written, the  
melody finishes with the melody data of that address. Otherwise, write "0", or omit it altogether.  
(5) Comment field  
Any comment, such as the program index or processing details, can be written in the comment field,  
with no affect on the object file created with the assembler.  
The comment field is the area between the semicolon ";" and the CR code at the end of the line.  
A line can be made up of a comment field alone. However, if the comment extends into two or more  
lines, each line must be headed with a semicolon.  
(6) Fields and corresponding melody data  
* Melody data  
MSB  
1/0  
3 bits  
0–8  
Number of bit is difference depending the model  
0–X (Refer to the "S5U1C62N8xD Manual".)  
LSB  
1/0  
Attack  
data  
Note  
data  
Scale address  
data  
End  
data  
• End data  
Becomes "0" when "0" is entered or no entry is made; otherwise, "1".  
• Scale address data  
Scale Data  
Scale  
Scale Data  
S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0 Hex.  
Table 4.2.3  
Scale  
S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0 Hex.  
Correspondence between scale and scale data  
C3  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
04 G4  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1 B1  
1 B5  
0 B8  
0 BC  
0 C0  
0 C4  
0 C8  
1 CD  
0 CE  
1 D3  
0 D4  
1 D9  
1 DB  
0 DC  
0 DE  
0 E0  
0 E2  
0 E4  
0 E6  
C3#  
D3  
12 G4#  
20 A4  
The scale or scale data written in the scale  
field is loaded into the scale ROM, and the  
address of the loaded scale data becomes  
the scale address data.  
D3#  
E3  
2F A4#  
1 3B B4  
F3  
0
1
44 C5  
F3#  
G3  
51 C5#  
1 5B D5  
65 D5#  
0 6C E5  
74 F5  
0 7C F5#  
84 G5  
1 8D G5#  
G3#  
A3  
1
A3#  
B3  
0
C4  
0
C4#  
D4  
0
0
92 A5  
D4#  
E4  
98 A5#  
0 9E B5  
0 A4 C6  
1 AB C6#  
F4  
F4#  
Note data  
Table 4.2.4  
Note Data 111 110 101 100 011 010 001 000  
Correspondence between notes and note data  
The correspondence between notes and  
note data are as follows.  
Note  
• Attack data  
"0" or "1" written in the attack field becomes the attack data.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
IV-5  
MELODY ASSEMBLER MLA628X  
5 PSEUDO-INSTRUCTIONS  
The pseudo-instruction is for the assembler, and cannot be executed by the melody data after  
development.  
In the explanations below, the symbols "<" and ">" used in the pseudo-instruction format indicate the  
contents of the statement. These symbols are not actually written. "_" indicates one or more spaces or tabs.  
The symbol, constant, arithmetic expression and so forth is written in "<expression>".  
5.1 Address-Setting Pseudo-Instruction  
ORG (ORIGIN)  
ORG_<Expression>  
Sets location counter  
The ORG instruction sets the value of <expression> in the location counter.  
If the ORG instruction does not head the source file, the location counter is set to 0 and assembly is  
performed. The ORG instruction can be used in multiple places in the program. However, it cannot be  
set in a location ahead of the current location counter, otherwise all the statements will be invalid until  
the next correct setting is performed, and "!" (Warning) is displayed.  
When a value exceeding the ROM capacity is specified, an R error results.  
5.2 Option-Setting Pseudo-Instructions  
Tempo selection  
The 2 types of tempo may be selected from  
among 16 types by using the option-setting  
pseudo-instructions (".TEMPC0 = n") and  
(".TEMPC1 = n").  
The option-setting pseudo-instructions and  
the corresponding tempo generated are  
shown in Table 5.2.1.  
The 2 types of tempo for TEMPC0 and  
TEMPC1 are selected by specifying n.  
The proper use of the 2 types of tempo  
selected is specified through the software.  
The 2 types of tempo which may selected  
are: TEMPC0 to be played when "0" is  
written on the TEMPC register (address:  
F2H, data bit: D1) and the TEMPC1 to be  
played when "1" is written on the said  
register.  
Table 5.2.1 Tempo setting  
Tempo  
symbol  
Option-setting  
pseudo-instruction  
Tempo  
symbol  
Option-setting  
pseudo-instruction  
30  
.TEMPC0 = 0  
.TEMPC1 = 0  
.TEMPC0 = 1  
.TEMPC1 = 1  
.TEMPC0 = 2  
.TEMPC1 = 2  
.TEMPC0 = 3  
.TEMPC1 = 3  
.TEMPC0 = 4  
.TEMPC1 = 4  
.TEMPC0 = 5  
.TEMPC1 = 5  
.TEMPC0 = 6  
.TEMPC1 = 6  
.TEMPC0 = 7  
.TEMPC1 = 7  
60  
.TEMPC0 = 8  
.TEMPC1 = 8  
.TEMPC0 = 9  
.TEMPC1 = 9  
.TEMPC0 = 10  
.TEMPC1 = 10  
.TEMPC0 = 11  
.TEMPC1 = 11  
.TEMPC0 = 12  
.TEMPC1 = 12  
.TEMPC0 = 13  
.TEMPC1 = 13  
.TEMPC0 = 14  
.TEMPC1 = 14  
.TEMPC0 = 15  
.TEMPC1 = 15  
32  
68.6  
34.3  
80  
36.9  
40  
96  
120  
160  
240  
480  
43.6  
48  
53.3  
.TEMPC0  
.TEMPC0=n  
Sets TEMPC0 (n = 0–15)  
The TEMPC0 option is set by specifying n as an integer in the range 0 to 15.  
This setting cannot be omitted.  
IV-6  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
MELODY ASSEMBLER MLA628X  
.TEMPC1  
.TEMPC1 = n  
Sets TEMPC1 (n = 0–15)  
The TEMPC1 option is set by specifying n as an integer in the range 0 to 15.  
This setting cannot be omitted.  
.OCTAVE  
.OCTAVE = m  
Sets scale range (m = 32 or 64)  
Decides the scale range by selecting the specification of the melody multiplier circuit.  
The specification becomes 32 kHz for m = 32, and the range becomes (C3–C6#).  
The specification becomes 64 kHz for m = 64, enabling output of notes one octave higher (C4–C7#) than  
can be done with the 32 kHz specification.  
For instance, even if the scale in the source file is C5, the actual sound generated will be C6.  
This setting cannot be omitted.  
6 ERROR MESSAGES  
When errors occur during assembly, MLA628X outputs the following error symbols or error  
messages to the console and assembly list file.  
Just one error symbol is output at the head (first column) of the statement that generated an error. (When  
multiple errors have been generated, the symbol for the error of highest priority is output.)  
The following error symbols are shown in order from highest priority.  
Error symbol (errors that can be assembled)  
S (Syntax error)................................. Major syntax error.  
Error in scale field ......... Exceeded scale range: C3–C6#  
Error in note field .......... Exceeded note range: 1–8  
Error in attack field ....... Number other than 0 or 1 was input.  
Error in end bit field ...... Number other than 0 or 1 was input.  
O (Scale ROM overflow) ................. The definition exceeded the scale ROM capacity.  
R (Range error) ............................. The value of the location counter exceeded the upper limit of the  
melody ROM capacity. Otherwise, the specified location exceeded  
the upper limit.  
Error messages  
(Fatal errors preventing assembly or output of assembly results)  
OPTION COMMAND MISSING .... Options cannot be set.  
FILE NAME ERROR ..................... The source filename has eight or more characters.  
FILE NOT PRESENT .................... The specified source file is not there.  
DIRECTORY FULL ....................... No more room in the directory of the specified disk.  
FATAL DISK WRITE ERROR ....... The file cannot be written to the disk.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
IV-7  
MELODY ASSEMBLER MLA628X  
APPENDIX SAMPLE FILES  
The following input/ output files are an example for the MLA6282 case and the data size, etc. will  
vary depending on the model.  
Example of Source File  
.TEMPC0=5  
.TEMPC1=8  
.OCTAVE=32  
;
1 1 C3  
0 4 D4  
0 4 F4  
0 2 F5  
0 3 G5#  
1 7 A4  
1 5 B4  
0 6 A4# 1  
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
1st Melody  
ORG 10H  
;
1 2 $C3  
0 3 $45  
0 7 $E3  
1 6 $97  
0 5 C6  
0 7 A5#  
1 3 $42 1  
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
2nd Melody  
Example of Assembly List  
LISTING OF MLA6282  
C282YYY.MPR 1991-6-01 14:25...PAGE  
Time  
Date  
1
ADRS CODE  
SOURCE  
File specifier of melody assembly list  
.TEMPC0 = 5  
.TEMPC1 = 8  
.OCTAVE = 32  
;
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
3C0  
102  
104  
186  
148  
24A  
2CC  
08F  
1 1 C3  
0 4 D4  
0 4 F4  
0 2 F5  
0 3 G5#  
1 7 A4  
1 5 B4  
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
0 6 A4# 1 ;  
1st Melody  
;
ORG 10H  
;
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
390  
152  
054  
296  
0D8  
05A  
35D  
1 2 $C3  
0 3 $45  
0 7 $E3  
1 6 $97  
0 5 C6  
0 7 A5#  
;
;
;
;
;
;
1 3 $42 1 ;  
2nd Melody  
0 ERROR(S) DETECTED  
IV-8  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
MELODY ASSEMBLER MLA628X  
SCALE ROM TABLE  
PAGE S-1  
CODE  
ADRS  
SCALE  
00000  
00001  
00010  
00011  
00100  
00101  
00110  
00111  
01000  
01001  
01010  
01011  
01100  
01101  
01110  
01111  
10000  
10001  
10010  
10011  
10100  
10101  
10110  
10111  
11000  
11001  
11010  
11011  
11100  
11101  
11110  
11111  
C3  
D4  
F4  
F5  
G5#  
A4  
B4  
A4#  
$C3  
$45  
$E3  
$97  
C6  
A5#  
$42  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
RR  
04  
92  
A4  
D4  
DC  
B8  
C0  
BC  
C3  
45  
E3  
97  
E4  
E0  
42  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
C4  
Example of scale ROM table  
- Hyphens "--" indicate unused code.  
- When unused, the code is FFH.  
- The last location, ADRS = "11111", of the scale  
ROM is fixed at SCALE = "RR" and CODE = "C4".  
Example of Melody Hex File Data Format  
:100000000101010101020200FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFEF  
:1000100001010002000003FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE2  
:10002000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE0  
:10003000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFD0  
:10004000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC0  
:10005000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFB0  
:10006000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFA0  
:10007000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF90  
:10008000C0020486484ACC8FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF3F  
:1000900090525496D85A5DFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0E  
:1000A000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF60  
:1000B000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF50  
:1000C000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF40  
:1000D000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF30  
:1000E000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF20  
:1000F000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF10  
:100100000492A4D4DCB8C0BCC345E397E4E042FF4A  
:10011000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC42A  
:100120000508FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFD0  
:1001300000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFCE  
:00000001FF  
Main ROM high-order (D8, D9)  
Main ROM low-order (D0D7)  
Scale ROM (D0D7)  
Option  
- Tempo  
- Octave  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
IV-9  
MELODY ASSEMBLER MLA628X  
Example of Assembly List When Error Occurs  
When an error occurs the code is made FFF forcibly. A value is not entered for the scale ROM.  
LISTING OF MLA6282  
C282YYY.MPR 1991-6-01 17:30...PAGE  
1
ADRS CODE  
SOURCE  
.TEMPC0 = 5  
.TEMPC1 = 8  
.OCTAVE = 32  
;
0
1
2
000  
062  
064  
FFF  
048  
FFF  
FFF  
0A9  
0 1 C3  
0 4 D4  
0 4 F4  
0 2 F6  
0 3 G5#  
2 7 A4  
1 9 B4  
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
S 3  
4
S 5  
S 6  
7
0 6 A4# 1 ;  
1st Melody  
;
ORG 10H  
;
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
02A  
06C  
0CE  
1B0  
092  
0D4  
056  
078  
09A  
07C  
FFF  
15F  
0 2 $C3  
0 3 $17  
0 7 $E3  
1 6 $97  
0 5 C6  
0 7 A5#  
0 3 E3  
0 4 G5  
0 5 G4  
0 4 G4#  
0 3 A4  
1 3 RR 1  
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
SCALE ROM TABLE  
PAGE S-1  
CODE  
ADRS  
SCALE  
00000  
00001  
00010  
00011  
00100  
00101  
00110  
00111  
01000  
01001  
01010  
01011  
01100  
01101  
01110  
01111  
10000  
10001  
10010  
10011  
10100  
10101  
10110  
10111  
11000  
11001  
11010  
11011  
11100  
11101  
11110  
11111  
C3  
D4  
F4  
F5  
G5#  
A4  
B4  
A4#  
$C3  
$45  
$E3  
$97  
C6  
A5#  
$42  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
RR  
04  
92  
A4  
D4  
DC  
B8  
C0  
BC  
C3  
45  
E3  
97  
E4  
E0  
42  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
FF  
C4  
19  
O 1A  
1B  
2nd Melody  
:
:
:
4E  
4F  
R 50  
S 51  
R 52  
05A  
05A  
FFF  
FFF  
FFF  
0 3 G4  
0 3 G4  
0 3 G4  
4 3 G4  
0 3 G4 1  
;
;
;
;
;
7 ERROR(S) DETECTED  
IV-10  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
MELODY ASSEMBLER MLA628X  
Example of Melody Document File Format  
:100000000101010101020200FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFEF  
:1000100001010002000003FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE2  
:10002000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE0  
:10003000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFD0  
:10004000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC0  
:10005000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFB0  
:10006000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFA0  
:10007000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF90  
:00000001FF  
Main ROM (high side)  
Intel hexadecimal format  
:10000000C0020486484ACC8FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFBF  
:1000100090525496D85A5DFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF8E  
:10002000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE0  
:10003000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFD0  
:10004000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC0  
:10005000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFB0  
:10006000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFA0  
:10007000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF90  
:00000001FF  
Main ROM (low side)  
Intel hexadecimal format  
:100000000492A4D4DCB8C0BCC345E397E4E042FF4B  
:10001000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC42B  
:00000001FF  
Scale ROM  
Intel hexadecimal format  
*
*
E0C6282 MELODY OPTION DOCUMENT V.3.10  
* OPTION NO.20  
*
*
OCTAVE CIRCUIT  
32KHZ -------------------- SELECTED  
OPT2001 01  
*
* OPTION NO.21  
Option selection  
*
*
*
< MELODY TEMPO SELECTION >  
TEMPC0 TEMPO 5 ------------ SELECTED  
TEMPC1 TEMPO 8 ------------ SELECTED  
OPT2101 03  
OPT2102 04  
OPT2103 02  
OPT2104 04  
\\END  
Note End mark "¥¥END" may be used instead of "\\END" depending on the PC used.  
(Because the code of both \ and ¥ is 5CH.)  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
IV-11  
V
FUNCTION OPTION GENERATOR  
FOG62XX  
This part mainly explains how to operate the Func-  
tion Option Generator FOG62XX for setting the  
hardware options of the S1C62 Family.  
FUNCTION OPTION GENERATOR FOG62XX  
FUNCTION OPTION GENERATOR FOG62XX  
Co nte nts  
1 DIFFERENCES DEPENDING ON THE MODEL __________________ V-1  
2 FOG62XX OUTLINE __________________________________________ V-1  
2.1 Outline of Function Option Generator................................................................... V-1  
2.2 FOG62XX Input/Output Files ................................................................................ V-1  
3 OPTION LIST GENERATION___________________________________ V-2  
3.1 Option List Recording Procedure .......................................................................... V-2  
3.2 Option List Example ............................................................................................... V-2  
4 FOG62XX OPERATION PROCEDURE ___________________________ V-3  
4.1 Starting FOG62XX ................................................................................................. V-3  
4.2 Setting New Function Options................................................................................ V-4  
4.3 Modifying Function Option Settings ...................................................................... V-5  
4.4 Selecting Function Options .................................................................................... V-6  
4.5 HEX File Generation and EPROM Selection ........................................................ V-7  
4.6 End Procedure........................................................................................................ V-7  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
V-i  
FUNCTION OPTION GENERATOR FOG62XX  
1 DIFFERENCES DEPENDING ON THE MODEL  
The set option content will vary depending on the model.  
Here only the operation will be explained, so you should refer to the "S5U1C62xxxD Manual" concerning  
the option specifications and the selection screen.  
2 FOG62XX OUTLINE  
2.1 Outline of Function Option Generator  
With the 4-bit single-chip S1C62XXX microcomputers, the customer may select hardware options. By  
modifying the mask patterns of the S1C62XXX according to the selected options, the system can be custom-  
ized to meet the specifications of the target system.  
Option list  
generation  
The FOG62XX Option Generator (hereinafter called  
FOG62XX) is a software tool for generating data files used  
to generate mask patterns. It enables the customer to  
Start FOG62XX  
interactively select and specify pertinent items for each  
hardware option. From the data file created with FOG62XX,  
the S1C62XXX mask pattern is automatically generated by a  
general purpose computer.  
Set function  
option  
The HEX file for the evaluation board (S5U1C62xxxE)  
hardware option ROM is simultaneously generated with the  
data file. By writing the contents of the HEX file into the  
EPROM and mounting it on the evaluation board, option  
functions can be executed on the evaluation board.  
C2XXYYYF  
.HEX  
C2XXYYYF  
.DOC  
Evaluation  
board  
The program name of FOG62XX is as follows:  
EPROM  
FOG62XX.EXE  
Seiko Epson  
Floppy disk  
Figure 2.1.1 shows the FOG62XX execution flow.  
Fig. 2.1.1 FOG62XX execution flow  
2.2 FOG62XX Input/Output Files  
Function options can be interactively selected, so an input file need not be generated. Select the hardware  
options that meet the specifications of the target system and record them in the option list (paper for  
recording items in preparation for input operation; explained later).  
FOG62XX outputs the following data files:  
• Function option document file (C2XXYYYF.DOC)  
This is a data file used to generate the mask patterns for such items as I/ O ports. This file must be sent  
with the completed program file. Already selected options can be modified.  
• Function option HEX file (C2XXYYYF.HEX)  
This is a function option file (Intel hexa format) used for evaluation board. One evaluation board  
function option ROM is generated by writing this file with the ROM writer.  
Remarks:  
• File name "YYY" is specified for each customer by Seiko Epson.  
Combine the document files with the program files (C2XXYYYH.HEX and C2XXYYYL.HEX) using the mask  
data checker (MDC62XX): copy the combined file into another diskette and submit to Seiko Epson.  
• Set all unused ROM areas to FFH when writing the HEX file into the EPROM. (Refer to "S5U1C62xxxE  
Manual" for the ROM installation location.)  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
V-1  
FUNCTION OPTION GENERATOR FOG62XX  
3 OPTION LIST GENERATION  
3.1 Option List Recording Procedure  
Multiple specifications are available in each option item as indicated in the Option List Example in Section  
3.2. Using the "S5U1C62xxxD Manual" as reference, select the specifications that meet the target system and  
check the appropriate box. Be sure to record the specifications for unused ports too, according to the  
instructions provided.  
Select the function options on the screen while referencing the option list.  
3.2 Option List Example  
The following is an example of option list. Refer to the "S5U1C62xxxD Manual" for the option list of each  
model.  
1. DEVICE TYPE  
1. E0C62XX  
2. E0C62LXX  
2. MULTIPLE KEY ENTRY RESET  
- COMBINATION ................................... 1. Not Use  
2. Use K00, K01  
3. Use K00, K01, K02  
4. Use K00, K01, K02, K03  
3. INTERRUPT NOISE REJECTOR  
- K00–K03.................................................. 1. Use  
2. Not Use  
4. INPUT PORT PULL DOWN RESISTOR  
- K00........................................................... 1. With Resistor  
- K01........................................................... 1. With Resistor  
- K02........................................................... 1. With Resistor  
- K03........................................................... 1. With Resistor  
2. Gate Direct  
2. Gate Direct  
2. Gate Direct  
2. Gate Direct  
5. R00 SPECIFICATION  
- OUTPUT TYPE ...................................... 1. D.C.  
2. Buzzer Inverted Output (Control bit is R00)  
3. Buzzer Inverted Output (Control bit is R01)  
- OUTPUT SPECIFICATION ................. 1. Complementary  
2. Pch Open Drain  
6. R01 SPECIFICATION  
- OUTPUT TYPE ...................................... 1. D.C.  
2. Buzzer Output  
- OUTPUT SPECIFICATION ................. 1. Complementary  
2. Pch Open Drain  
7. OUTPUT PORT OUTPUT SPECIFICATION (R02, R03)  
- R02 ........................................................... 1. Complementary  
- R03 ........................................................... 1. Complementary  
:
2. Pch Open Drain  
2. Pch Open Drain  
V-2  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
FUNCTION OPTION GENERATOR FOG62XX  
4 FOG62XX OPERATION PROCEDURE  
4.1 Starting FOG62XX  
To start FOG62XX, enter the following at DOS command level (state in which a prompt such as A> is  
displayed):  
indicates the return key.  
A>FOG62XX  
When starting FOG62XX through the DMS6200, selects the "FOG62XX.EXE" in the menu screen.  
When FOG62XX is started, the following message is displayed.  
*** E0C62XX FUNCTION OPTION GENERATOR. --- Ver 3.02 ***  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEE  
PPPPPPPP  
PPPPPPPPPP  
PPP  
PPP  
PPPPPPPPPP  
PPPPPPPP  
PPP  
PPP  
PPP  
PPP  
SSSSSSS  
SSS SSSS  
SSS SSS  
SSS  
SSSSSS  
SSSS  
SSS  
OOOOOOOO  
OOO OOO  
OOO OOO  
NNN  
NNNN  
NNNNN  
NNNNNN NNN  
NNN NNN NNN  
NNN NNNNNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
PPP  
PPP  
EEE  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEE  
EEE  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEEEEEEEEE  
NNNNN  
NNNN  
NNN  
SSS  
SSSS  
SSS  
SSS  
OOO  
OOO  
SSSSSSS  
OOOOOOOO  
NN  
(C) COPYRIGHT 1991 SEIKO EPSON CORP.  
THIS SOFTWARE MAKES NEXT FILES.  
C2XXYYYF.HEX ... FUNCTION OPTION HEX FILE.  
C2XXYYYF.DOC ... FUNCTION OPTION DOCUMENT FILE.  
STRIKE ANY KEY.  
For "STRIKE ANY KEY," press any key to advance the program execution. To suspend execution, press the  
"CTRL" and "C" keys together: the sequence returns to the DOS command level. (It is possible by pressing  
"STOP" key depending on the PC used.)  
Following the start message, the date currently set in the personal computer is displayed, prompting entry  
of a new date.  
*** E0C62XX USER'S OPTION SETTING. --- Ver 3.02 ***  
CURRENT DATE IS 91/07/19  
PLEASE INPUT NEW DATE :  
91/07/22  
When modifying the date, enter the 2-digit year, month, and day of the month by delimiting them with a  
slash ("/ ").  
When not modifying the date, press the RETURN key " " to continue.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
V-3  
FUNCTION OPTION GENERATOR FOG62XX  
When the date is set, the following operation selection menu is displayed on the screen.  
*** OPERATION SELECT MENU ***  
1. INPUT NEW FILE  
2. EDIT FILE  
3. RETURN TO DOS  
PLEASE SELECT NO.?  
Enter a number from 1 to 3 to select a subsequent operation. The items indicate the following.  
1. INPUT NEW FILE: Used to set new function options.  
2. EDIT FILE:  
Used to read the already-generated function option document file and set or  
modify the option contents. In this case, the work disk must contain the function  
option document file (C2XXYYYF.DOC) generated by "1. INPUT NEW FILE".  
3. RETURN TO DOS: Used to terminate FOG62XX and return to the DOS command level.  
4.2 Setting New Function Options  
This section explains how to set new function options.  
*** OPERATION SELECT MENU ***  
1. INPUT NEW FILE  
2. EDIT FILE  
3. RETURN TO DOS  
PLEASE SELECT NO.? 1  
. . (1)  
. . (2)  
. . (3)  
PLEASE INPUT FILE NAME? C2XXYYY  
PLEASE INPUT USER'S NAME? SEIKO EPSON CORP.  
PLEASE INPUT ANY COMMENT  
(ONE LINE IS 50 CHR)? TOKYO DESIGN CENTER  
. . (4)  
? 421-8 HINO HINO-SHI TOKYO 191 JAPAN  
?
(1) PLEASE SELECT NO.?  
Select "1. INPUT NEW FILE" on the operation selection menu.  
(2) PLEASE INPUT FILE NAME?  
Enter the file name. Do not enter the extended part of the file name. In case a function option document  
file (C2XXYYY.DOC) with the same name as the file name specified in the current drive exists, the user  
is asked whether overwrition is desired. Enter "Y" or "N" accordingly.  
Example: PLEASE INPUT FILE NAME? C2XXYYY  
EXISTS OVERWRITE (Y/N)?  
(3) PLEASE INPUT USER'S NAME?  
Enter the customer's company name.  
V-4  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
FUNCTION OPTION GENERATOR FOG62XX  
(4) PLEASE INPUT ANY COMMENT  
Enter any comment. Up to 50 characters may be entered in one line. If 51 or more characters are entered  
in one line, they are ignored. Up to 10 comment lines may be entered. To end entry of comments, press  
the RETURN key " ". Include the following in comment lines:  
• Company, department, division, and section names  
• Company address, phone number, and FAX number  
• Other information, including technical information  
Next, start function option setting. For new settings, select function options from No. 1 to last number  
sequentially and interactively. Refer to the "S5U1C62xxxD Manual" for the option selection procedure.  
4.3 Modifying Function Option Settings  
This section explains how to modify the function option settings.  
*** OPERATION SELECT MENU ***  
1. INPUT NEW FILE  
2. EDIT FILE  
3. RETURN TO DOS  
PLEASE SELECT NO.? 2  
*** SOURCE FILE(S) ***  
. . (1)  
. . (2)  
C2XX0A0  
C2XX0B0  
C2XX0C0  
PLEASE INPUT FILE NAME? C2XXYYY  
PLEASE INPUT USER'S NAME?  
PLEASE INPUT ANY COMMENT  
. . (3)  
. . (4)  
(ONE LINE IS 50 CHR)?  
PLEASE INPUT EDIT NO.? 4  
. . (5)  
. . (6)  
(1) PLEASE SELECT NO.?  
Select "2. EDIT FILE" on the operation selection menu.  
(2) *** SOURCE FILE(S) ***  
Will display the function option document files on the current drive.  
If no modifiable source exists, the following message is displayed and the program is terminated.  
FUNCTION OPTION DOCUMENT FILE IS NOT FOUND.  
(3) PLEASE INPUT FILE NAME?  
Enter a file name. Do not enter the extended part of the file name. If the function option document file  
(C2XXYYYF.DOC) is not in the current drive, an error message like the one below is output, prompting  
entry of other file name.  
Example: PLEASE INPUT FILE NAME? C2XX0N0  
FUNCTION OPTION DOCUMENT FILE IS NOT FOUND.  
(4) PLEASE INPUT USER'S NAME?  
When modifying the customer's company name, enter a new name. The previously entered name may  
be used by pressing the RETURN key " ".  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
V-5  
FUNCTION OPTION GENERATOR FOG62XX  
(5) PLEASE INPUT ANY COMMENT  
When modifying a comment, enter all the comment lines anew, beginning with the first line; comment  
data cannot be partially modified. Previously entered comment data can be used by pressing the  
RETURN key " ". The input condition are the same as for new settings.  
(6) PLEASE INPUT EDIT NO.?  
Enter the number of the function option to be modified, then start setting the option contents.  
When selection of one option is complete, the system prompts entry of another function option number.  
Repeat selection until all options to be modified are selected.  
If the " " key is pressed without entering a number, the option of the subsequent number can be  
selected.  
Enter "E " to end option setting. Then, move to the confirmation procedure for HEX file generation  
(See Section 4.5).  
Example: • When modifying the settings of the function option of No. 9  
PLEASE INPUT EDIT NO.? 9  
• When ending setting  
PLEASE INPUT EDIT NO.? E  
4.4 Selecting Function Options  
Option selection is done interactively. For new settings, set Options 1 to last sequentially; to modify  
settings, the specified option number may be set directly.  
*** OPTION NO.3 ***  
The selections for each option correspond  
one to one to the option list. While refer-  
ring to the contents recorded in the option  
list, enter the selection number.  
--- MULTIPLE KEY ENTRY RESET ---  
COMBINATION  
1. Not Use  
2. Use K00,K01  
3. Use K00,K01,K02  
4. Use K00,K01,K02,K03  
In the message that prompts entry, the  
value in parentheses ( ) indicates the  
default value in case of new settings, or the  
previously set value in case of setting  
modification. This value is set when only  
the RETURN key " " is pressed.  
PLEASE SELECT NO.(1) ? 2  
COMBINATION  
2. Use K00,K01 SELECTED  
*** OPTION NO.4 ***  
In return, the confirmation is displayed.  
--- INTERRUPT NOISE REJECTOR ---  
When you wish to modify previously set  
function options in the new setting  
process, enter "B " to return 1 step back to  
the previous function option setting  
operation.  
K00-K03  
1. Use  
2. Not Use  
PLEASE SELECT NO.(1) ? B  
*** OPTION NO.3 ***  
--- MULTIPLE KEY ENTRY RESET ---  
When function option setting is completed,  
move to the confirmation procedure for  
HEX file generation (See Section 4.5).  
COMBINATION  
1. Not Use  
2. Use K00,K01  
3. Use K00,K01,K02  
4. Use K00,K01,K02,K03  
PLEASE SELECT NO.(1) ?  
V-6  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
FUNCTION OPTION GENERATOR FOG62XX  
4.5 HEX File Generation and EPROM Selection  
When setting function options setting is completed, the following message is output to ask the operator  
whether to generate the HEX file.  
END OF OPTION SETTING.  
DO YOU MAKE HEX FILE (Y/N) ? Y  
When debugging the program with evaluation  
board, HEX file C2XXYYYF.HEX is needed.  
. . (1)  
*** OPTION EPROM SELECT MENU ***  
Note The EPROM to be mounted on the  
evaluation board must satisfy the following  
conditions:  
1. 27C64  
2. 27C128  
3. 27C256  
4. 27C512  
EPROM for setting function options:  
Tacc 250 ns  
(Tacc: Access time)  
PLEASE SELECT NO.? 2  
. . (2)  
2. 27C128  
SELECTED  
(1) DO YOU MAKE HEX FILE (Y/N)?  
When debugging the program with evaluation board, HEX file C2XXYYYF.HEX is needed, so enter "Y".  
If "N" is entered, no HEX files are generated and only document files C2XXYYYF.DOC is generated.  
(2) PLEASE SELECT NO.?  
For the option ROM selection menu displayed when "Y" is entered in Step (1), select the EPROM to be  
used for setting evaluation board options. This menu is not displayed when "N" is entered in Step (1).  
One EPROM is required for setting function options (27C128 is selected in the above example).  
When the above operation is completed,  
FOG62XX generates files. If no error is committed  
while setting segment options, the following  
MAKING FILE(S) IS COMPLETED.  
message is output and the sequence returns to the  
operation selection menu.  
4.6 End Procedure  
This section explains how to end FOG62XX execution.  
*** OPERATION SELECT MENU ***  
When a series of operations are complete, the  
sequence returns to the operation selection menu.  
Execution of FOG62XX can be ended by selecting  
"3. RETURN TO DOS" on this menu. If "1. INPUT  
NEW FILE" or  
1. INPUT NEW FILE  
2. EDIT FILE  
3. RETURN TO DOS  
PLEASE SELECT NO.? 3  
A>  
"2. EDIT FILE" is selected, setting function options  
can be performed again.  
FOG62XX can be forcibly terminated by pressing the "CTRL" and "C" keys together during program  
execution. (It is possible by pressing "STOP" key depending on the PC used.)  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
V-7  
VI  
SEGMENT OPTION GENERATOR  
SOG62XX  
This part mainly explains how to operate the Seg-  
ment Option Generator SOG62XX for setting the  
segment options of the S1C62 Family.  
SEGMENT OPTION GENERATOR SOG62XX  
SEGMENT OPTION GENERATOR SOG62XX  
Co nte nts  
1 DIFFERENCES DEPENDING ON THE MODEL __________________ VI-1  
2 SOG62XX OUTLINE___________________________________________ VI-1  
2.1 Outline and Execution Flow .................................................................................. VI-1  
2.2 SOG62XX Input/Output Files ................................................................................ VI-2  
3 OPTION LIST GENERATION___________________________________ VI-3  
3.1 Example of Option List .......................................................................................... VI-3  
3.2 Segment Ports Output Specifications .................................................................... VI-3  
4 SOG62XX OPERATION PROCEDURE ___________________________ VI-4  
4.1 Creating Segment Option Source File................................................................... VI-4  
4.2 Starting SOG62XX ................................................................................................ VI-6  
4.3 Input File Selection ............................................................................................... VI-7  
4.4 HEX File Generation and EPROM Selection ....................................................... VI-8  
4.5 End Procedure....................................................................................................... VI-8  
5 ERROR MESSAGES ___________________________________________ VI-9  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VI-i  
SEGMENT OPTION GENERATOR SOG62XX  
1 DIFFERENCES DEPENDING  
ON THE MODEL  
The segment output specific, display memory capacity and address will vary depending on the  
model.  
Here the explanation will focus on the method of operation. For the optional specifications, we will provide  
an outline explanation as an example for the case of models with standard segment specifications that are  
set by the four terminal common output, so you should refer to the "S5U1C62xxxD Manual" for details on  
each model.  
The SOG62XX is not included in the software for models that are not set by the segment option.  
2 SOG62XX OUTLINE  
2.1 Outline and Execution Flow  
With the 4-bit single-chip S1C62XXX microcomputers, the customer may select the LCD segment options.  
By modifying the mask patterns of the S1C62XXX according to the selected options, the system can be  
customized to meet the specifications of the target system.  
The SOG62XX Segment Option Generator (hereinafter called SOG62XX) is a software tool for generating  
data files used to generate mask patterns. From the data file created with SOG62XX, the S1C62XXX mask  
pattern is automatically generated by a general purpose computer.  
The HEX file for the evaluation board  
(S5U1C62xxxE) segment option ROM is  
Option list  
generation  
Segment source  
file generation  
simultaneously generated with the data file. By  
writing the contents of the HEX file into the  
EPROM and mounting it on the evaluation  
board, option functions can be executed on the  
evaluation board.  
C2XXYYY  
.SEG  
The program name of SOG62XX is as follows:  
SOG62XX.EXE  
Start SOG62XX  
Figure 2.1.1 shows the SOG62XX execution flow.  
C2XXYYYS  
.HEX  
C2XXYYYS  
.DOC  
Evaluation  
board  
EPROM  
Fig. 2.1.1 SOG62XX execution flow  
Seiko Epson  
Floppy disk  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VI-1  
SEGMENT OPTION GENERATOR SOG62XX  
2.2 SOG62XX Input/Output Files  
SOG62XX reads a source file containing segment port specification, and output following files.  
Segment option source file (C2XXYYY.SEG)  
The specifications of segment ports must be set in the segment source file (input file for SOG62XX). If  
the segment source file is not generated, SOG62XX stops execution.  
Generate the segment source file using an editor such as EDLIN while referencing the option list.  
Segment option document file (C2XXYYYS.DOC)  
This is a data file used to generate the mask patterns of the segment decoder and segment output port.  
Segment option HEX file (C2XXYYYS.HEX)  
This is a segment option file for evaluation board (Intel hexa format). Evaluation board segment option  
ROMs are generated by writing this file with the ROM writer.  
Remarks:  
• File name "YYY" is specified for each customer by Seiko Epson.  
• Combine the segment option document file (C2XXYYYS.DOC) with the program files (C2XXYYYH.HEX  
and C2XXYYYL.HEX) and the function option document file (C2XXYYYF.DOC) using the mask data  
checker (MDC62XX): copy the combined file into another diskette and submit to Seiko Epson.  
• Set all unused ROM areas to FFH when writing the HEX file into the EPROM. (Refer to "S5U1C62xxxE  
Manual" for the ROM installation location.)  
VI-2  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
SEGMENT OPTION GENERATOR SOG62XX  
3 OPTION LIST GENERATION  
3.1 Example of Option List  
The following table shows an example of the option list in case of the four commons. Refer to the  
"S5U1C62xxxD Manual" for the option list of each model.  
Example of option list  
Multiple specifications are available in  
segment option item as indicated in the  
following example. Using "S5UC62xxxD  
Manual" as reference, select the specifica-  
tions that meet the target system and  
check the appropriate box. Be sure to  
record the specifications for unused ports  
too, according to the instructions pro-  
vided.  
ADDRESS  
COM1 COM2  
L
TERMINAL  
COM0  
L
COM3  
L
OUTPUT SPECIFICATION  
NAME  
H
D
H
D
H
L
D
H
D
SEG output  
DC output  
SEG0  
SEG1  
SEG2  
SEG3  
SEG4  
SEG5  
:
C
C
C
P
P
P
SEG output  
DC output  
SEG output  
DC output  
:
:
Legend:  
<ADDRESS>  
<OUTPUT SPECIFICATION>  
C: Complementary output  
P: Pch open drain output  
Furthermore, write the segment memory  
addresses as well as the selected output  
specifications.  
H: High order address  
L: Low order address  
D: Data bit  
Create a segment option source file by  
using the option list as reference.  
3.2 Segment Ports Output Specifications  
For the output specification of the segment output ports (SEG0–SEG*), segment output and DC output can  
be selected in units of two terminals. When used for liquid crystal panel drives, select segment output;  
when used as regular output port, select DC output. When DC output is selected, either complementary  
output or Pch open drain (Nch open drain is set depending on the model used) may further be selected.  
However, for segment output ports that will not be used, select segment output.  
When segment output is selected  
The segment output port has a segment decoder built-in, and the data bit of the optional address in the  
segment memory area can be allocated to the optional segment.  
The segment memory may be allocated only one segment and multiple setting is not possible.  
Segment allocation is set to H for high address, to L for low address (0–F), and to D for data bit (0–3)  
and are recorded in their respective column in the option list. For segment ports that will not be used,  
write a hyphen ("-") each on the H, L, and D columns.  
The allocated segment displays when the bit for this segment memory is set to "1", and goes out when  
bit is set to "0".  
When DC output is selected  
The DC output can be selected in units of two terminals. Also, either complementary output or open  
drain output is likewise selected in units of two terminals. When the bit for the selected segment  
memory is set to "1", the segment output port goes high (VDD), and goes low (VSS) when set to "0".  
Segment allocation is the same as when segment output is selected but for the while the segment  
memory allocated to COM1–COM3 becomes ineffective. Write three hyphens ("---") in the COM1–  
COM3 columns in the option list.  
Note The configuration of the common terminals (COM0COM3) may vary depending on the model.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VI-3  
SEGMENT OPTION GENERATOR SOG62XX  
4
SOG62XX OPERATION PROCEDURE  
4.1 Creating Segment Option Source File  
The SOG62XX needs, as an input file, a segment option source file containing the specifications for the  
segment output ports. Using the editor, generate this source file by referencing the contents of the option  
list. Use the following file name. For "YYY", enter the string distributed by Seiko Epson.  
C2XXYYY.SEG  
Write the output specifications (SEG output, DC complementary output, or DC open drain output) and the  
segment memory-SEG ports correspondence data (data that associates segment memory addresses to SEG  
ports) in the file. Comments may also be written in the file. The description procedure is explained by  
using a sample segment option source file.  
Note In the following examples, there are cases of models where the common output is 4 terminals and  
the 900HAFFH is set in the display memory area. You should be aware of the fact that the number  
of output ports and the display memory address may vary depending on the model.  
; C2XXYYY.SEG  
; LCD SEGMENT DECODE TABLE  
;
Comment  
0
1
2
3
4
5
:
901  
912  
913  
A00  
AE0  
AF0  
:
900  
911  
920  
902  
---  
---  
:
932  
910  
921  
930  
---  
---  
:
A20  
923  
922  
931  
---  
---  
:
S
S
S
S
C
C
:
;1st DIGIT  
;DC OUTPUT  
Segment memory-SEG ports  
correspondence data  
Output  
specification data  
Comment  
Comment  
A statement beginning with a semicolon (";") is considered a comment. Such items as date, summary,  
and version may be written in such a line.  
Segment memory-SEG ports correspondence data  
This data indicates correspondence between segment memory addresses and segment ports. The  
arrangement is the same as that of the option list, so write the data in the following format while  
referencing the option list.  
0_901_900_932_A20  
:_:::_:::_:::_:::  
Segment memory data bit (D)  
Segment memory low-order address (L)  
0–3  
0–F  
COM3  
COM2  
COM1  
COM0  
Segment memory high-order address (H) 9–A*  
Segment memory data bit (D)  
Segment memory low-order address (L)  
0–3  
0–F  
Segment memory high-order address (H) 9–A*  
Segment memory data bit (D)  
Segment memory low-order address (L)  
0–3  
0–F  
Segment memory high-order address (H) 9–A*  
Segment memory data bit (D)  
Segment memory low-order address (L)  
0–3  
0–F  
Segment memory high-order address (H) 9–A*  
SEG port number  
Note The high-order address of the segment  
memory may vary depending on the model.  
VI-4  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
SEGMENT OPTION GENERATOR SOG62XX  
• Each SEG port number corresponds to an actual device, so it must be unique. Moreorve, data descrip-  
tions in accordance with the following format are required for segments SEG0–SEG25.  
• Off areas COM0 to COM3, write three successive "---" (3 hyphens) as data for unused areas. SEG port  
numbers are needed even if the ports themselves will not be used, so write "---" (3 hyphens) for all areas  
COM0 to COM3.  
Example: When not using COM2 in SEG8  
8_981_980_---_A22  
Example: When not using SEG12  
12_---_---_---_---  
• When "DC output" is selected, write the segment memory-SEG ports correspondence data for COM0;  
"---" (hyphens) for COM1 to COM3.  
Example: When outputting SEG20 and SEG21 as DC output  
20_933_---_---_---  
21_A33_---_---_---  
• Symbol "_" indicates a blank or tab. Be sure to write one or more blanks or a tab between the SEG port  
number, COM0, COM1, COM2, and COM3.  
Output specification selection data  
This data is used to specify whether the SEG port will be used as a segment output port, a DC comple-  
mentary output port, or a DC open drain output port.  
Write data after inserting one or more blanks or a tab after the segment memory-SEG ports correspond-  
ence data.  
S: Segment output  
C: DC complementary output  
P: DC Pch open drain output  
Either one is set, depending on the model.  
N: DC Nch open drain output  
• The SEG port output specifications must be selected in units of two ports, so write the selection data  
carefully while referencing the option list.  
Example: When outputting SEG22 and SEG23 as DC complementary output  
22_AE0_---_---_---_C  
23_AF0_---_---_---_C  
• Select "SEG output" for the segment ports that will not be used.  
Example: When not using SEG18  
18_---_---_---_---_S  
Note Only complementary output is enabled as the DC output of the SEG ports of evaluation board.  
Therefore, complementary output is enabled even if open drain output is selected. Respond to it by  
adding external circuits as required.  
Generate the segment option source file according to the formats and restrictions above.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VI-5  
SEGMENT OPTION GENERATOR SOG62XX  
4.2 Starting SOG62XX  
To start SOG62XX, enter the following at the DOS command level (state in which a prompt such as A> is  
displayed):  
_ indicates a blank.  
A parameter enclosed by [ ] can be omitted.  
A>SOG62XX_[-H]  
indicates the return key.  
When starting SOG62XX through the DMS6200, selects the "SOG62XX.EXE" in the menu screen, and input  
options necessary.  
The current drive must contain the segment option source file (C2XXYYY.SEG).  
-H: Specifies the segment option document file (C2XXYYY.DOC) for input file of SOG62XX.  
When SOG62XX is started, the following message is displayed.  
*** E0C62XX SEGMENT OPTION GENERATOR. --- Ver 3.00 ***  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEE  
PPPPPPPP  
PPPPPPPPPP  
PPP  
PPP  
PPPPPPPPPP  
PPPPPPPP  
PPP  
PPP  
PPP  
PPP  
SSSSSSS  
SSS SSSS  
SSS SSS  
SSS  
SSSSSS  
SSSS  
SSS  
SSS  
SSS  
SSSSSSS  
OOOOOOOO  
OOO OOO  
OOO OOO  
NNN  
NNNN  
NNNNN  
NNNNNN NNN  
NNN NNN NNN  
NNN NNNNNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
PPP  
PPP  
EEE  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEE  
EEE  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEEEEEEEEE  
NNNNN  
NNNN  
NNN  
SSS  
SSSS  
OOO  
OOO  
OOOOOOOO  
NN  
(C) COPYRIGHT 1991 SEIKO EPSON CORP.  
SEGMENT OPTION SOURCE FILE NAME IS " C2XXYYY.SEG ".  
THIS SOFTWARE MAKES NEXT FILES.  
C2XXYYYS.HEX ... SEGMENT OPTION HEX FILE.  
C2XXYYYS.DOC ... SEGMENT OPTION DOCUMENT FILE.  
STRIKE ANY KEY.  
For "STRIKE ANY KEY.", press any key to advance the program execution. To suspend execution, press the  
"CTRL" and "C" keys together: the sequence returns to the DOS command level. (It is possible by pressing  
"STOP" key depending on the PC used.)  
Following the start message, the date currently set in the personal computer is displayed, prompting entry  
of a new date.  
*** E0C62XX USER'S OPTION SETTING. --- Ver 3.00 ***  
CURRENT DATE IS 91/07/19  
PLEASE INPUT NEW DATE :  
91/07/22  
When modifying the date, enter the 2-digit year, month, and day of the month by delimiting them with a  
slash ("/ ").  
When not modifying the date, press the RETURN key " " to continue.  
VI-6  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
SEGMENT OPTION GENERATOR SOG62XX  
4.3 Input File Selection  
*** SOURCE FILE(S) ***  
C2XX0A0  
C2XX0B0  
C2XX0B1  
C2XX0C0  
. . (1)  
PLEASE INPUT SEGMENT SOURSE FILE NAME? C2XX0A0  
PLEASE INPUT USER'S NAME? SEIKO EPSON CORP.  
PLEASE INPUT ANY COMMENT  
. . (2)  
. . (3)  
(ONE LINE IS 50 CHR)? TOKYO DESIGN CENTER  
. . (4)  
? 421-8 HINO HINO-SHI TOKYO 191 JAPAN  
?
(1) *** SOURCE FILE(S) ***  
• H option use  
Will display the segment option source files on the current drive.  
If no source files exists, the following message will be displayed and the program will be terminated.  
SEGMENT OPTION SOURCE FILE IS NOT FOUND.  
• H option not use  
Will display the segment option document files on the current drive.  
If no document files exists, the following message will be displayed and the program will be terminated.  
SEGMENT OPTION DOCUMENT FILE IS NOT FOUND.  
(2) PLEASE INPUT SEGMENT SOURCE FILE NAME?  
• H option use  
Enter the segment option source file name. Do not enter the extended part of the file name. If the  
specified file name is not found in the current drive, an error message like the one below is output,  
prompting entry of another file name:  
Example:  
PLEASE INPUT SEGMENT SOURCE FILE NAME? C2XX0N0  
SEGMENT OPTION SOURCE FILE IS NOT FOUND.  
• H option not use  
Enter the segment option document file name. Do not enter the extended part of the file name. If the  
specified file name is not found in the current drive, an error message like the one below is output,  
prompting entry of another file name:  
Example:  
PLEASE INPUT SEGMENT DOCUMENT FILE NAME? C2XX0N0  
SEGMENT OPTION DOCUMENT FILE IS NOT FOUND.  
(3) PLEASE INPUT USER'S NAME?  
Enter the customer's company name.  
(4) PLEASE INPUT ANY COMMENT  
Enter any comment. Up to 50 characters may be entered in one line. If 51 or more characters are entered  
in one line, they are ignored. Up to 10 comment lines may be entered. To end entry of comments, press  
the RETURN key " ". Include the following in comment lines:  
• Company, department, division, and section names  
• Company address, phone number, and FAX number  
• Other information, including technical information  
When the above operations are complete, move to the confirmation procedure for HEX file generation.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VI-7  
SEGMENT OPTION GENERATOR SOG62XX  
4.4 HEX File Generation and EPROM Selection  
When input file selection is completed, the following message is output to ask the operator whether to  
generate the HEX file.  
END OF OPTION SETTING.  
DO YOU MAKE HEX FILE (Y/N) ? Y  
. . (1)  
*** OPTION EPROM SELECT MENU ***  
1. 27C64  
2. 27C128  
3. 27C256  
4. 27C512  
PLEASE SELECT NO.? 2  
. . (2)  
2. 27C128  
SELECTED  
(1) DO YOU MAKE HEX FILE (Y/N)?  
When debugging the program with evaluation board, HEX file C2XXYYYS.HEX is needed, so enter "Y".  
If "N" is entered, no HEX file is generated and only document file C2XXYYYS.DOC is generated.  
However, when H option is used, HEX file is generated without any conditions. Therefore, this menu is  
not displayed.  
(2) PLEASE SELECT NO.?  
For the option ROM selection menu displayed when "Y" is entered in Step (1), select the EPROM to be  
used for setting evaluation board options. This menu is not displayed when "N" is entered in Step (1).  
"27C128" is selected in the above example.  
When the above operation is completed, SOG62XX generates files. If no error is committed while setting  
segment options, the following message is output and the SOG62XX program will be terminated.  
MAKING FILE IS COMPLETED.  
Note The EPROM to be mounted on the evaluation board must satisfy the following conditions:  
EPROM for setting segment option:Tacc 170 ns (Tacc: Access time)  
4.5 End Procedure  
When a series of operations are complete, the SOG62XX program will be terminated.  
SOG62XX can be forcibly terminated by pressing the "CTRL" and "C" keys together during program  
execution. (It is possible by pressing "STOP" key depending on the PC used.)  
VI-8  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
SEGMENT OPTION GENERATOR SOG62XX  
5 ERROR MESSAGES  
If an error is detected in the segment option source file, an error message is displayed. In this case,  
the segment option HEX file is not generated, and the segment option document file consisting of the  
segment option source file and an error message is generated.  
Note In the following examples, there are cases of models where the common output is 4 terminals, the segment  
output is 26 terminals and the 900HAFFH is set in the display memory area. You should be aware of the  
fact that the number of output ports and the display memory address may vary depending on the model.  
N 12  
S 16  
D 20  
N 22  
D 23  
R 25  
66  
15  
19  
42  
22  
24  
9B0  
9B1  
9F1  
A31  
A51  
A61  
881  
9B2  
9F2  
A32  
A52  
A31  
A82  
9B3  
9F3  
A31  
A53  
A31  
A83  
S
S
S
S
S
S
9F0MSD  
A30  
A50  
A60  
A80  
Duplication is SEG NO. 19 COM NO. 3  
Duplication is SEG NO. 22 COM NO. 2  
Duplication is SEG NO. 22 COM NO. 3  
7 ERROR(S)  
STRIKE ANY KEY.  
MAKING SEGMENT OPTION FILES IS NOT COMPLETED BY SOURCE FILE ERROR-(S).  
If one or more errors are detected, error symbols are output in column 0 and the source lists containing the  
errors are output in subsequent columns. The following four error symbols are used for SOG62XX:  
S: Syntax error  
N: Segment number selection error  
R: RAM address selection error  
D: Duplication error  
The priority order is S, N, R, and D.  
Each type of error is explained here.  
S: Syntax error  
This type of error occurs when the data was written in an invalid format. Correct the segment option  
source file format.  
Example: S 16 15  
9F0MSD 9F1  
9F2  
9F3  
S
This format is invalid  
N: Segment number selection error  
This type of error occurs when a segment number outside the specificable range is specified. Correct the  
segment option source file so that all segment numbers are in the specificable range.  
Example: N 12 66  
9B0  
A50  
9B1  
A51  
9B2  
A52  
9B3  
A53  
S
S
N 22 42  
These values exceeds the range  
R: RAM address selection error  
This type of error occurs when the segment memory address or data bit outside the specificable range.  
Correct the segment option source file so that all addresses are in the specificable range and all data bits  
are 0 to 3.  
Example: R 25 24  
A80  
881  
A82  
A83  
S
This value exceeds the range  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VI-9  
SEGMENT OPTION GENERATOR SOG62XX  
D: Duplication error  
This type of error occurs when the same data (SEG port No., segment memory address, or data bit) is  
specified more than once. Correct the segment option source file so that each data item is unique in the  
description.  
Example: D 20 19  
A30  
A60  
A31  
A61  
A32  
A31  
A31  
A31  
S
S
D 23 22  
"A31" is used more then once  
Duplication is SEG NO. 19 COM NO. 3  
Duplication is SEG NO. 22 COM NO. 3  
Message "Duplication is ..." is output only for the second and subsequent duplicated data items.  
In some cases, the following error message is output.  
Out Port Set Error  
This error occurs when the output specifications were not set in units of two ports. Correct the segment  
option source file to satisfy this condition.  
Example: Segment No. 18 - 19 Out Port Set Error  
This error is not checked when one of the above four errors (S, N, R, or D) is detected. Therefore, this  
error may occur after the above error are corrected.  
If an error occurs, the displayed message can be checked by referencing the segment option document file.  
Correct the segment option source file by comparing it with the option list, then rerun the program.  
The following is an example of the segment option document file when some errors occurred.  
LINE SOURCE STATEMENT  
1 0  
2 1  
900  
910  
920  
930  
940  
950  
960  
970  
980  
990  
9A0  
9B0  
9C0  
9D0  
9E0  
901  
911  
921  
931  
941  
951  
961  
971  
981  
991  
9A1  
9B1  
9C1  
9D1  
9E1  
902  
912  
922  
932  
942  
952  
962  
972  
982  
992  
9A2  
9B2  
9C2  
9D2  
9E2  
9F2  
A02  
A12  
A22  
A32  
A42  
A52  
A31  
A72  
A82  
A92  
903  
913  
923  
933  
943  
953  
963  
973  
983  
993  
9A3  
9B3  
9C3  
9D3  
9E3  
9F3  
A03  
A13  
A23  
A31  
A43  
A53  
A31  
A73  
A83  
A93  
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
3 2  
4 3  
5 4  
6 5  
7 6  
8 7  
9 8  
10 9  
11 10  
N 12 66  
13 12  
14 13  
15 14  
S 16 15  
17 16  
18 17  
19 18  
D 20 19  
21 20  
N 22 42  
D 23 22  
24 23  
R 25 24  
26 25  
9F0MSD 9F1  
A00  
A10  
A20  
A30  
A40  
A50  
A60  
A70  
A80  
A90  
A01  
A11  
A21  
A31  
A41  
A51  
A61  
A71  
881  
A91  
S --- Syntax Error  
N --- Segment No. Select Error  
R --- RAM Address Select Error  
D --- Duplication Error  
Duplication is SEG NO. 19 COM NO. 3  
Duplication is SEG NO. 22 COM NO. 3  
VI-10  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
VII  
EVALUATION BOARD  
S5U1C62xxxE  
This part explains the function of the Evaluation  
Board S5U1C62xxxE, a debugging tool for the  
S1C62XXX, and the operation of the evaluation  
board.  
EVALUATION BOARD S5U1C62XXXE  
EVALUATION BOARD S5U1C62xxxE  
Co nte nts  
1 DIFFERENCES DEPENDING ON THE MODEL __________________VII-1  
2 S5U1C62XXXE OUTLINE ______________________________________VII-1  
3 PRECAUTIONS_______________________________________________VII-2  
3.1 Precautions for Operation.....................................................................................VII-2  
3.2 Differences from Actual IC....................................................................................VII-2  
4 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS ___________________________VII-3  
4.1 Basic Functions .....................................................................................................VII-3  
4.2 Operating Panel (Top view) ..................................................................................VII-3  
4.3 Under Top Cover ...................................................................................................VII-5  
4.4 Front Panel............................................................................................................VII-5  
4.5 Rear Panel .............................................................................................................VII-6  
4.6 Under Bottom Cover .............................................................................................VII-6  
5 CABLE CONNECTION ________________________________________VII-7  
5.1 Connection to ICE (S5U1C62000H) .....................................................................VII-7  
5.2 Power Cable Connection.......................................................................................VII-7  
5.3 Connection to Target System .................................................................................VII-7  
6 OPERATION METHOD OF S5U1C62XXXE _______________________VII-8  
6.1 Preparation ...........................................................................................................VII-8  
6.1.1 Creation of target system ............................................................................. VII-8  
6.1.2 Creation and installation of ROMs ............................................................. VII-8  
6.2 Independent Use of S5U1C62xxxE........................................................................VII-9  
6.2.1 Power on/off ................................................................................................ VII-9  
6.2.2 Debugging ................................................................................................... VII-9  
6.3 Operation When ICE (S5U1C62000H) is Connected ..........................................VII-10  
6.3.1 Power on/off ............................................................................................... VII-10  
6.3.2 Debugging .................................................................................................. VII-10  
7 OPERATING TEST ___________________________________________ VII-10  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VII-i  
EVALUATION BOARD S5U1C62XXXE  
1 DIFFERENCES DEPENDING  
ON THE MODEL  
The S5U1C62xxxE has the same functions as the actual IC (S1C62XXX). Although the method of  
operation and other functions are the same, the terminal layout of the I/ O and LCD connectors and the  
input/ output signal specifications are different. The layout in the top panel is also different.  
Refer to the "S5U1C62xxxE Manual" included with the hardware for details on each model.  
2 S5U1C62XXXE OUTLINE  
The S5U1C62xxxE is a debugging tool for the S1C62XXX, with various functions such as single step  
and program break.  
Almost the same functions that the S1C62XXX CPU has can be implemented by writing application  
program and option data created by the option generator into EPROM, and installing it in the  
S5U1C62xxxE.  
Debugging and CPU monitoring can be done using the S5U1C62xxxE operation switches and LED indica-  
tors; therefore, debugging is possible with the S5U1C62xxxE alone.  
In addition, the S5U1C62xxxE can interface with the ICE (S5U1C62000H) in-circuit emulator, and so  
perform a higher level of debugging.  
OFF  
ON DC IN FUSE  
5V 3A  
POWER  
F5  
F1  
EVA62XX  
E0C62XX EVALUATION BOARD  
H
L
RAM  
SP  
F
3
3
2
2
2
1
1
1
0
0
0
7
7
7
6
6
6
5
5
5
4
4
4
3
3
3
2
2
2
1
1
1
0
0
0
IF DF ZF CF  
IR  
X
Y
A
B
B
A
A
9
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
B
B
A
A
9
9
8
8
3
3
2
2
1
0
PCP  
9
PCS  
3
B
PCB  
BB  
8
4
1
0
RUN  
STEP  
BP  
BS  
3
SA  
EN  
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
2
1
0
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DIS  
BREAK POINT  
RAM ADDRESS  
SEIKO EPSON CORP.  
I/O #0  
I/O #1  
S5U1C62xxxE  
LCD #0  
LCD #1  
The name 'EVA62XX' on the development tool is the old name of the product.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VII-1  
EVALUATION BOARD S5U1C62XXXE  
3 PRECAUTIONS  
Take the following precautions when using the S5U1C62xxxE:  
3.1 Precautions for Operation  
• Turn the power of all equipment off before connecting or disconnecting cables.  
• To turn the POWER switch of the S5U1C62xxxE off, then on again, wait for at least 10 seconds after  
turning off before turning on.  
• When ROMs are inserted into the L and H ROM sockets, lock the lever securely by positioning it  
horizontally. After the ROMs have been removed from the sockets, lock the lever at the same position  
above. If the lever is left upright, poor contact may result.  
• Confirm that the ROMs have been installed correctly, then operate the S5U1C62xxxE.  
• If the S5U1C62xxxE does not operate normally, perform the operation test. (See "S5U1C62xxxE  
Manual".)  
3.2 Differences from Actual IC  
There are some differences in functions between the S5U1C62xxxE and the actual IC.  
I/O differences  
The response time has been changed by the differences in logic level (5 V for the S5U1C62xxxE), output  
drive capability, and pull-down/ up resistance. When creating key scan routines, especially, pay  
attention to the response time.  
LCD differences  
• The LCD contrast is adjusted by the VADJ control. However, the contrast level of each actual IC is  
fixed, so it cannot be adjusted.  
No Pch/ Nch open drain option can be selected.  
• The output drive capability is different.  
Power-on sequence differences  
The S5U1C62xxxE performs configuration and determines the internal state when the power is  
switched on. Then, it works as the IC does. Therefore, the I/ O state of the S5U1C62xxxE is unstable  
until configuration has completed. This affects the power-on reset time.  
Function differences  
The oscillation start and stop times are different from those of the IC.  
Because the logic level of S5U1C62xxxE is higher than it of actual IC.  
Functions may differ depending on the model, so you should refer to the "S5U1C62xxxE Manual" for other  
differences.  
VII-2  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EVALUATION BOARD S5U1C62XXXE  
4 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS  
This section describes the names and functions of the parts of the S5U1C62xxxE.  
4.1 Basic Functions  
The S5U1C62xxxE has the following basic functions:  
Program execution (Run function)  
Install the EPROM containing the application program and execute the program.  
Single-step program operation (Single-step function)  
Programs may be run instruction by instruction to check the internal state of the CPU as it changes with  
each instruction.  
Program execution suspension at a given address (Break function)  
A breakpoint may be set at an address at which it is desired to suspend program execution. After  
execution has stopped at the breakpoint, it can be restarted with the program run function.  
Displaying program addresses and instruction codes during a break  
Program addresses and instruction codes may be displayed on the LED indicators.  
Displaying the contents of RAM, registers, and flags during a break  
The contents of RAM, the A, B, X, and Y registers, the stack pointers, and the flags may be displayed on  
the LED indicators during a break.  
Interface with ICE  
The S5U1C62xxxE can interface with the ICE so that a higher level debugging environment may be  
established.  
Setting hardware options by installing function option and segment option ROMs  
Hardware options, i.e., I/ O ports and segments, can be specified by writing option data for the func-  
tions created by the function option generator and the segment option created by the segment option  
generator into EPROM, and installing the EPROM.  
4.2 Operating Panel (Top view)  
OFF ON DC IN FUSE  
POWER  
5 V  
3 A  
Switches and keys  
F5  
F1  
EN/DIS switch  
EVA62XX  
E0C62XX EVALUATION BOARD  
This switch enables or disables the setting of  
breakpoints. When the switch is in the EN  
(Enable) position, the setting of breakpoints is  
enabled. When it is in the DIS (Disable)  
position, the setting of breakpoints is  
disabled. Normally, set the switch to the DIS  
position.  
H
L
RAM  
SP  
F
IFDFZFCF  
3210  
76543210  
IR  
X
A
BA9876543210  
BA9876543210  
3210  
PCP  
PCS  
Y
B
PCB 321076543210  
BA9876543210  
3210  
BP  
BS  
SA  
RUN STEP  
BA9876543210  
EN BB 321076543210  
Fig. 4.2.1 Operating panel  
BREAK POINT  
RAM ADDRESS  
DIS  
Position of pin 1  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VII-3  
EVALUATION BOARD S5U1C62XXXE  
BREAK POINT switches (BB, BP, BS)  
These switches set a breakpoint address at which program execution stops. BB, BP, and BS are switches  
that set the bank, page, and step, respectively, of the breakpoint address. When a switch is in the upper  
position, it represents "1"; when it is in the lower position, it represents "0".  
The breakpoint address set with the BREAK POINT switches is valid when the EN/ DIS switch is in the  
EN position. When the set address matches the current address of the program being executed, the  
program breaks, i.e., it stops immediately before executing the instruction at the current address. This  
function does not work when the EN/ DIS switch is in the DIS position.  
RAM ADDRESS switches (SA)  
These switches are used to set RAM addresses and to check the contents of RAM after a program break.  
When a switch is in the upper position, it represents "1"; when it is in the lower position, it represents  
"0". The contents of the address set with these switches are displayed on the RAM display LEDs.  
RUN key  
This key restarts the program after a break. When it is pressed, the program continues, starting with the  
instruction at the break address.  
STEP key  
When this key is pressed, the program breaks immediately. If the key is pressed during a break, the  
instruction step at the break address is executed, and the program breaks again. Thus, the program can  
be executed step by step.  
LEDs  
The internal state of the CPU is indicated by the LEDs. An LED lit indicates "1"; an LED not lit indicates "0".  
RAM (3210)  
The contents of the RAM address, which are fixed by the RAM ADDRESS switch,  
are displayed.  
IR (BA9876543210) The instruction at the current address is displayed. If the program has stopped at  
a breakpoint, the instruction is displayed before execution.  
PCB  
The bank address is displayed.  
The page address is displayed.  
The step address is displayed.  
PCP (3210)  
PCS (76543210)  
SP (76543210)  
The value of the stack pointer is displayed.  
X (BA9876543210) The contents of the X index register are displayed.  
Y (BA9876543210) The contents of the Y index register are displayed.  
F/IF  
The state of the interrupt flag is displayed.  
The state of the decimal flag is displayed.  
The state of the zero flag is displayed.  
The state of the carry flag is displayed.  
The contents of the A register are displayed.  
The contents of the B register are displayed.  
F/DF  
F/ZF  
F/CF  
A (3210)  
B (3210)  
ROM sockets  
L (low) and H (high)  
These are IC sockets for target program ROMs. Insert the ROM (L.HEX) containing the 8 low-order bits  
(I7 to I0) of the machine code into the L socket, and the ROM (H.HEX) containing the 4 high-order bits  
(IB to I8) into the H socket. Insert the diagnostic ROM into a socket when an operation test is performed.  
Connectors  
F1 and F5  
Connectors for the ICE interface cable.  
VII-4  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EVALUATION BOARD S5U1C62XXXE  
4.3 Under Top Cover  
The layout and content within the top cover will vary depending on the model.  
The below content is laid out here in a basic manner. Refer to the "S5U1C62xxxE Manual" for details.  
RESET switch  
This switch resets the CPU and starts the target program from page 01H, step 00H.  
VADJ  
This is the control for adjusting the LCD contrast.  
(Refer to the "S5U1C62xxxE Manual".)  
VSVD  
This is the control for varying the power supply voltage in simulation to check SVD operation.  
(Refer to the "S5U1C62xxxE Manual".)  
This control is not present in models that do not have the SVD function.  
DONE  
This LED lights when the S5U1C62xxxE has completed configuration at power-on and is ready for  
debugging. If this LED is not lit several seconds after power-on, switch the power off and then on again.  
F.HEX (ROM sockets)  
This is the IC socket into which the ROM (F.HEX) is inserted. This ROM includes the function options  
generated by the function option generator (FOG62XX).  
LED and CHK pin  
LEDs that display the value ("1" or "0") of the special I/ O registers and a terminals for confirmation by  
oscilloscope or a like device have been provided.  
4.4 Front Panel  
There are several connectors on the front panel for connecting the S5U1C62xxxE to the target system.  
I/O #0, I/O #1  
Connector for the I/ O cable. The I/ O cable is used  
to connect the S5U1C62xxxE to the target system.  
I/O #0  
LCD #0, LCD #1  
I/O #1  
Connector for the LCD cable. The LCD cable is  
used to connect the S5U1C62xxxE to the target  
system.  
LCD #0, #1  
Position of pin 1  
Fig. 4.4.1 Front panel  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VII-5  
EVALUATION BOARD S5U1C62XXXE  
4.5 Rear Panel  
The external power input section is on the rear panel.  
POWER switch (on/off)  
This is a switch to turn on or off the external power  
supply to S5U1C62xxxE. (Please turn off the POWER  
switch when ICE is connected.)  
FUSE  
DC  
IN 5 V  
POWER ON/OFF  
FUSE  
1
0
This is 3 A of the 3 A tubular fuse for external power  
supply, and is blown off by current of 3 A or more.  
DC INPUT  
GND +5 V  
DC IN 5 V  
This is a connector with external power supply source.  
The external power supply should be in direct current of  
5 V for 3 A or more.  
Fig. 4.5.1 Rear panel  
Note: Be sure to disconnect external power source before  
connection with ICE, because power is supplied from  
ICE when you connect S5U1C62xxxE to ICE.  
4.6 Under Bottom Cover  
ROM sockets  
This is the IC sockets into which the ROM is inserted.  
These ROMs (S.HEX) include the assignment of LCD  
segments generated by the segment option generator  
(SOG62XX). The mark indicates the position of pin 1.  
Insert the same ROMs (two) into the sockets.  
This socket is not present in models that do not have the  
segment option.  
<Under Bottom Cover>  
Fig. 4.6.1 Under bottom cover  
ROM sockets  
Position of pin 1  
VII-6  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EVALUATION BOARD S5U1C62XXXE  
5 CABLE CONNECTION  
This section describes how to connect the power cable to the S5U1C62xxxE, and the S5U1C62xxxE to  
the ICE and the target system.  
Note: Turn the power of all equipment off before connecting or disconnecting cables.  
5.1 Connection to ICE (S5U1C62000H)  
The S5U1C62xxxE is connected to the ICE by connecting the two interface cables (F1 and F5). Use  
S5U1C62xxxE connectors F1 and F5 with the projections facing outwards. Use ICE connectors F1 and F5  
with the projections facing inwards (cable side).  
Figures 5.1.1 and 5.1.2 show the external view and connection diagram of the ICE interface cable.  
S5U1C62xxxE  
ICE  
F1  
F5  
2
: :  
: :  
: :  
: :  
: :  
1
2
: :  
: :  
: :  
: :  
: :  
1
50 49  
50 49  
ICE side  
S5U1C62xxxE side  
Red mark  
Fig. 5.1.1 External view of the ICE interface cable  
Fig. 5.1.2 Connection diagram  
Note: The S5U1C62xxxE has an external power input connector for +5 V (VDD) and GND (VSS). Leave  
these connectors unconnected when the S5U1C62xxxE is connected to the ICE.  
5.2 Power Cable Connection  
When using the S5U1C62xxxE on its own, it  
must be supplied with power (5 V DC, 3 A or  
more) from an external source through the  
power cable.  
When the S5U1C62xxxE is connected to the  
ICE, power is supplied by the ICE; therefore,  
the power cable is not necessary. Disconnect  
the power cable if it is already connected.  
Black  
-
Connect to the  
Connect to the  
external power  
supply  
power connector  
of the S5U1C62xxxE  
+
Red  
Fig. 5.2.1 Connection of power cable pins  
Figure 5.2.1 shows the connection of the power cable pins.  
5.3 Connection to Target System  
The I/ O #0, I/ O #1, LCD #0 and LCD #1  
connectors are used to connect the  
S5U1C62xxxE to the target system.  
I/O cable  
S5U1C62xxxE  
The signals output from the LCD #0 and  
LCD #1 connectors are the same as those of  
the actual IC at the function level. There-  
fore, the S5U1C62xxxE may be connected to  
the LCD of the target system without any  
changes. The LCD contrast (LCD drive  
voltage) is adjusted by the VADJ control.  
Refer to the "S5U1C62xxxE Manual" for the  
configuration and pins of the connectors.  
Target  
I/O  
connector  
system  
I/O #0, #1  
LCD #0, #1  
LCD  
connector  
LCD cable  
Front  
Fig. 5.3.1 Connection of target system  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VII-7  
EVALUATION BOARD S5U1C62XXXE  
6
OPERATION METHOD OF S5U1C62XXXE  
6.1 Preparation  
This section describes the common preparation work necessary when the S5U1C62xxxE is used by itself  
and when it is connected to the ICE. Connection method, refer to Chapter 5, "CABLE CONNECTION".  
Check the S5U1C62xxxE operation by mounting the supplied diagnostic ROMs as instructed in the  
"S5U1C62xxxE Manual". It is recommended that this test be performed periodically.  
Before doing the following, be sure to turn the POWER switch of the S5U1C62xxxE off.  
6.1.1 Creation of target system  
Mount the LCD panel, keys, and switches on the board to build a target system. Use the I/ O connectors  
and LCD connectors supplied with the S5U1C62xxxE to connect the S5U1C62xxxE to the target system.  
(For the pin layout of each connector, see the "S5U1C62xxxE Manual".)  
Note: There is some difference in specifications between the S5U1C62xxxE and the actual CPU. Refer to  
Section 2.2 in the "S5U1C62xxxE Manual", "Differences from Actual IC" when building a target  
system.  
6.1.2 Creation and installation of ROMs  
Create the program ROMs, function option  
Program ROMs (two)  
ROM and segment option ROMs, and insert  
H
L
them into the sockets of the S5U1C62xxxE.  
When the S5U1C62xxxE is delivered, the  
function option ROM and segment option  
ROMs for a diagnostic program are already  
installed. Replace them with the created  
ROMs.  
Top of S5U1C62xxxE  
Segment option ROMs  
(two, behind the  
bottom cover, S.HEX)  
Function option ROM  
(one, behined the top  
cover, F.HEX)  
Fig. 6.1.2.1 Installation of ROMs  
Program ROMs (two)  
The program ROMs contain the application program machine code. Write the HEX files output by the  
ASM62XX cross-assembler into EPROMs to create program ROMs. Since two HEX files containing the  
high-order section (C2XXYYYH.HEX) and the low-order section (C2XXYYYL.HEX) of the machine code  
are output, two ROMs are created. Insert H.HEX into socket H and L.HEX into socket L on the top  
panel. These ROMs are not necessary when connecting the S5U1C62xxxE to the ICE.  
Function option ROM (one)  
The function option ROM is used to specify function options, such as I/ O ports. Create the option ROM  
from the function option HEX file (C2XXYYYF.HEX) output by the function option generator, and  
insert it into the ROM1 socket (F.HEX) in the top cover.  
Segment option ROMs (two)  
...Only for the models that have the segment option.  
The segment option ROMs are used to specify segment output ports. Create two segment ROMs (with  
the same contents) from the segment option HEX file (C2XXYYYS.HEX) output by the segment option  
generator, and insert them into two S.HEX sockets in the bottom cover.  
EPROM specifications  
Use EPROMs with the following specifications:  
Program ROM:  
Function option ROM: 27C64 to 27C512  
Segment option ROM: 27C64 to 27C512  
27C64 to 27C512  
(250 ns or less access time)  
(250 ns or less access time)  
(170 ns or less access time)  
VII-8  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EVALUATION BOARD S5U1C62XXXE  
6.2 Independent Use of S5U1C62xxxE  
This section describes operation when using the S5U1C62xxxE by itself.  
The S5U1C62xxxE may be used independently by connecting a power supply to it. Use a 5 V DC regulator  
(more than 3 A) as an external power supply. Connect it with the correct polarity (+ and -).  
(Refer to Section 5.2, "Power Cable Connection".)  
6.2.1 Power on/off  
Before turning the POWER switch of the S5U1C62xxxE on, confirm the following:  
(1) The power cable is connected correctly.  
(2) The target system is connected correctly.  
(3) The ROMs have been installed correctly.  
After confirming the above items, turn the POWER switch of the S5U1C62xxxE on using the following proce-  
dure:  
(1) Turn the regulator on. If the regulator is of the variable-voltage type, set the output voltage to 5 V.  
(2) Turn the POWER switch of the S5U1C62xxxE on.  
Note: To turn the POWER switch of the S5U1C62xxxE off, then on, turn it off, wait for 10 seconds or more,  
and then turn it on.  
After the POWER switch of the S5U1C62xxxE has been turned on, the DONE LED (green) on the top cover  
lights after several seconds to indicate that debugging may proceed. If the DONE LED is still off 10 seconds  
or more after the POWER switch has been turned on, do the following:  
(1) Turn the POWER switch of the S5U1C62xxxE off.  
(2) Confirm that the ROMs have been installed properly, and the cables connected properly.  
(3) Check the fuse.  
(4) Turn the POWER switch of the S5U1C62xxxE on.  
If the DONE LED still does not light, do a self-diagnosis.  
For the self-diagnosis method, refer to the "S5U1C62xxxE Manual".  
6.2.2 Debugging  
When the S5U1C62xxxE is used alone, it provides the following debugging functions. The method of  
operation is given below.  
Program free run  
When the RESET switch (on the top cover) is pressed, the S5U1C62xxxE enters the program run state,  
and executes the application program from page 1, step 0. Before pressing the RESET switch after the  
power to the S5U1C62xxxE has been switched on, make sure that the DONE LED is lit.  
Program break  
The program may be stopped at the address set by the BREAK POINT switches. This function is valid  
when the EN/ DIS switch is in the EN position. The program stops at the program address where the  
breakpoint is set. It stops before the instruction at the breakpoint is executed. The program may be  
stopped by pressing the STEP key.  
When the program is stopped, the LED indicators for the internal state of the CPU show the current  
state. So debug by checking this state against the program.  
To restart the program after a break, set the next breakpoint, and press the RUN key.  
The single-step operation (described below) can be performed by pressing the STEP key instead of the  
RUN key.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VII-9  
EVALUATION BOARD S5U1C62XXXE  
Single step  
By pressing the STEP key after a program break, the one instruction at the current address can be  
executed, and the program stopped at the next address (program break). Using this function, the  
program run state can be confirmed.  
For the other functions, refer to the "S5U1C62xxxE Manual".  
6.3 Operation When ICE (S5U1C62000H) is Connected  
This section explains the operation and use of the S5U1C62xxxE when it is connected to the ICE.  
Set up the S5U1C62xxxE as follows when it is connected to the ICE:  
(1) Do not connect the power supply.  
(2) Keep on turning the POWER switch off.  
(3) Set all the switches on the operation panel to their lower positions.  
6.3.1 Power on/off  
Power to the S5U1C62xxxE is supplied by the ICE, and the power is switched on and off by pressing the  
POWER switch of the ICE. Keep the POWER switch of the S5U1C62xxxE off.  
Note: To turn the POWER switch of the ICE off, then on, turn it off, wait for 10 seconds or more, and then  
turn it on.  
After the POWER switch of the ICE has been turned on, the DONE LED (green) on the top cover of the  
S5U1C62xxxE lights after several seconds to indicate that debugging may proceed. If the DONE LED is still  
off 10 seconds or more after the POWER switch has been turned on, do the following:  
(1) Turn the POWER switch of the ICE off.  
(2) Confirm that the circuit breaker of the ICE is on.  
(3) Confirm that the ROMs have been installed properly and the cables connected properly.  
(4) Turn the POWER switch of the ICE on.  
If the DONE LED still does not light, do a self-diagnosis.  
For the self-diagnosis method, refer to the "S5U1C62xxxE Manual".  
6.3.2 Debugging  
Debugging is done with the host computer, and the S5U1C62xxxE is controlled by the ICE. For the method  
of operation, refer to Part VIII, "ICE Control Software ICS62XX".  
The switches except the reset switch and LEDs are invalid. Do not operate the switches of the S5U1C62xxxE  
side. The target program ROM is invalid when the ROM is installed.  
7 OPERATING TEST  
Self-diagnosis of the S5U1C62xxxE can be performed with the following operating tests. To perform  
these tests, the function option ROM, two segment ROMs and two program ROMs (supplied) are required.  
If these ROMs have not been installed, insert them into the sockets. To use the S5U1C62xxxE  
independently, connect the external power supply (5 V DC, 3 A).  
Refer to the "S5U1C62xxxE Manual" for details of the operating test.  
VII-10  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
VIII  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE  
ICS62XX  
This part mainly explains the function of  
S5U1C62000H, a software development  
support system for the S1C62XXX 4-bit  
Single Chip Microcomputer, and the  
operation of ICS62XX, its ICE control  
software.  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
Co nte nts  
1 DIFFERENCES DEPENDING ON THE MODEL _________________ VIII-1  
2 S5U1C62000H SPECIFICATIONS ______________________________ VIII-2  
2.1 Features ................................................................................................................ VIII-2  
2.1.1 Description .................................................................................................. VIII-2  
2.1.2 Software configuration ................................................................................ VIII-2  
2.1.3 Function table .............................................................................................. VIII-3  
2.1.4 Function-differentiated command list ......................................................... VIII-4  
2.1.5 Alphabetical listing of commands ............................................................... VIII-6  
2.2 Connecting and Starting the System ..................................................................... VIII-8  
2.2.1 HOST settings .............................................................................................. VIII-8  
2.2.2 Starting the ICS62XX .................................................................................. VIII-9  
2.3 S5U1C62000H Operation and Functions ........................................................... VIII-10  
2.3.1 Operating features ...................................................................................... VIII-10  
2.3.2 Break mode and break function .................................................................. VIII-10  
2.3.3 SYNC pin and HALT pin output ................................................................. VIII-12  
2.3.4 Display during run mode and during break ............................................... VIII-12  
2.3.5 Break assigning commands ........................................................................ VIII-13  
2.3.6 Target interrupt and break ......................................................................... VIII-14  
2.3.7 History function .......................................................................................... VIII-14  
2.3.8 Break delay function ................................................................................... VIII-15  
2.3.9 Coverage function ...................................................................................... VIII-15  
2.3.10 Measurement during command execution ................................................ VIII-16  
2.3.11 Self-diagnostic function ............................................................................ VIII-16  
2.3.12 Starting the printer ................................................................................... VIII-17  
2.3.13 Limitations during emulation ................................................................... VIII-17  
3 COMMAND DETAILS _______________________________________ VIII-18  
3.1 Display Command Group .................................................................................... VIII-19  
L command ......................................................................................................... VIII-20  
DP command ...................................................................................................... VIII-22  
DD command ...................................................................................................... VIII-24  
DR command ...................................................................................................... VIII-26  
H command ......................................................................................................... VIII-27  
HB, HG commands ............................................................................................. VIII-30  
HS, HSR, HSW commands .................................................................................. VIII-32  
HP, HPS commands ........................................................................................... VIII-33  
CHK command ................................................................................................... VIII-34  
DXY command .................................................................................................... VIII-35  
CVD, CVR commands......................................................................................... VIII-36  
3.2 Set Command Group ........................................................................................... VIII-37  
A command ......................................................................................................... VIII-38  
FP command ....................................................................................................... VIII-40  
FD command ...................................................................................................... VIII-41  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-i  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
MP command ...................................................................................................... VIII-42  
MD command ..................................................................................................... VIII-43  
SP command ....................................................................................................... VIII-44  
SD command ....................................................................................................... VIII-45  
SR command ....................................................................................................... VIII-46  
SXY command ..................................................................................................... VIII-47  
HC command ...................................................................................................... VIII-48  
HA, HAD, HAR commands ................................................................................. VIII-49  
3.3 Break and Go Command Group.......................................................................... VIII-51  
BA, BAR commands ............................................................................................ VIII-52  
BD, BDR commands ........................................................................................... VIII-53  
BR, BRR commands ............................................................................................ VIII-54  
BM, BMR commands .......................................................................................... VIII-56  
BC command....................................................................................................... VIII-58  
BRES command .................................................................................................. VIII-59  
G command ......................................................................................................... VIII-60  
T command ......................................................................................................... VIII-63  
U command ......................................................................................................... VIII-65  
BE, BSYN commands .......................................................................................... VIII-66  
BT command ....................................................................................................... VIII-67  
BRKSEL command ............................................................................................. VIII-68  
3.4 File Command Group .......................................................................................... VIII-69  
RF, RFD commands ........................................................................................... VIII-70  
VF, VFD commands ........................................................................................... VIII-71  
WF, WFD commands .......................................................................................... VIII-72  
CL, CS commands............................................................................................... VIII-73  
OPTLD command ............................................................................................... VIII-74  
3.5 ROM Command Group ....................................................................................... VIII-75  
RP command ....................................................................................................... VIII-76  
VP command ....................................................................................................... VIII-77  
ROM command ................................................................................................... VIII-78  
3.6 Control Command Group .................................................................................... VIII-79  
I command .......................................................................................................... VIII-80  
TIM command ..................................................................................................... VIII-81  
OTF command .................................................................................................... VIII-82  
Q command ......................................................................................................... VIII-83  
3.7 HELP Command.................................................................................................. VIII-85  
HELP command .................................................................................................. VIII-86  
4 ERROR MESSAGE SUMMARY _______________________________ VIII-90  
APPENDIX HEX FILE FORMAT _______________________________ VIII-91  
VIII-ii  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
1 DIFFERENCES DEPENDING  
ON THE MODEL  
Be sure to pay close attention to the following points, since the memory capacity will vary with the  
different models of the S1C62 Family, due to program preparation.  
The limiting items for each model are indicated in the "S5U1C62xxxD Manual".  
ROM area  
The ROM capacity will vary depending on the model.  
ICE command specifications that exceed the final ROM address will be errors.  
RAM area  
The RAM capacity and area used will vary depending on the model.  
ICE command specifications that exceed the final RAM address and specifications for unused area will  
be errors.  
Undefined code  
In the S1C62 Family, the instruction set is not different from model to model. However, you may not be  
able to use instructions such as the SLP instruction and those that access the page section (XP and YP)  
of the index register depending on the RAM content. When specified it results in an error.  
OPTLD command  
The OPTLD command is the command that loads such things as melody HEX files and the models  
where it can be used are limited.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-1  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
2 S5U1C62000H SPECIFICATIONS  
2.1 Features  
The ICE (S5U1C62000H) is a microcomputer  
software development support tool that increases  
the efficiency of software development for the  
S1C62 Family of 4-bit single chip microcomput-  
ers.  
The ICE and the S1C62 Family evaluation board  
(S5U1C62xxxE), when used in combination,  
provide an exceptionally powerful hardware and  
software development support environment.  
The following flow chart shows the creation  
sequence of the single chip microcomputer  
system from development through mass produc-  
tion.  
Determination of specifications  
Hardware  
Software  
Software  
development  
General purpose  
Prototype operation  
Operation of target  
system connected to  
an evaluation board  
personal computers,  
cross assemblers, etc  
Debugging and  
system evaluation  
Debug procedure with  
ICE, evaluation board,  
target and peripheral  
devices connected  
Sample order  
Sample evaluation  
Mass production order  
Mass production  
Use of the ICE and evaluation board can greatly  
shorten the development process time required  
for debugging and system evaluation procedures.  
Fig. 2.1.1  
Development flow  
2.1.1 Description  
A description of the ICE follows.  
(1) The ICE operates by connecting to a general purpose personal computer (IBM PC/ XT, PC/ AT). The  
debugging environment is constructed by the user's personal computer acting as the host system.  
(2) High-performance emulation commands are provided. A variety of commands are supplied, such as a  
register value implemented break function, on-the-fly data display, history display, and other high-  
level functions.  
(3) The ICE is equipped with a special power supply. This power source supplies VDD to the evaluation  
board, making additional power supply from the user side unnecessary.  
(4) The ICE can also be used to analyze hardware. Hardware debugging is supported through the SYNC  
and HALT terminals.  
2.1.2 Software configuration  
OS (Operating System)  
PC-DOS  
General  
Purpose  
Editor  
ASM62XX  
Cross  
Assembler  
ICS62XX  
ICE Control  
Software  
ICE control software  
runs on personal  
computer (FD)  
Cross Assembler  
leased the S1C62XXX (FD)  
Control program  
mounted on  
the ICE  
ICE  
Firmware  
Customer's application  
program mounted on  
the ICE (ROM)  
Fig. 2.1.2.1 Software configuration  
Application  
Program  
VIII-2  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
2.1.3 Function table  
Table 2.1.3.1 shows the functions supported by the ICE (S5U1C62000H).  
Table 2.1.3.1 ICE (S5U1C62000H) functions  
Item  
number  
Item  
Brief description of function  
Comments  
1
Real-time break The target program is interrupted under optional conditions  
(1) Break by program counter (PC)  
(2) RAM address, data, R/W break  
(3) Break by register value  
(4) Break via a combination of items (1)–(3) (AND, OR)  
(5) Forced break by RESET or BREAK switch settings  
(6) Forced break by host system Escape key input  
2
History  
Evaluation board CPU data collection during emulation  
(1) Collection of PC, instruction code, RAM R/W, or CPU  
register values  
(2) Approx. 2048 instruction bus data collections  
(3) Collects information up to the hit of break condition, or before  
or after the hit  
(4) Collects history information within the specified program area  
(5) Searches for history information  
3
4
5
Real-time  
execution  
Real-time  
measurement  
Target memory  
referenced or  
modified  
Target program is run in real time at frequencies up to 4 MHz  
Emulation run in real time (up to approx. 425 msec) or  
step number count  
(1) ICE packaged target program memory is referenced, modified,  
or dumped  
(2) Target program memory-mapped I/O is referenced or modified  
(3) Internal CPU registers are referenced or modified  
Target program is executed step by step and register contents are  
displayed  
Mnemonic input is converted to machine language and stored in  
program memory; contents of memory are disassembled  
(1) Data from FD is loaded to the program or verified  
(2) Program data is saved to FD  
6
7
8
Trace  
Assemble/  
Disassemble  
FD loaded,  
saved or  
verified  
(3) ICE interim results are loaded or saved to FD  
(4) Data from FD memory is loaded, saved or verified  
Program is loaded to program memory from the ICE ROM socket  
and verified  
9
ROM read or  
verify  
10  
Execution  
supervision  
Coverage  
Other  
During G command execution, the program counter and  
halt state are displayed  
Acquire coverage information  
11  
12  
(1) Printer start and stop  
(2) ICE command display  
(3) Evaluation board CPU reset  
(4) Evaluation board CPU status on LED display  
(5) Execution with SYNC pulse output at breakpoint, but without  
break  
(6) 2764 to 27512 EPROM (target) support  
(7) ICE hardware check  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-3  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
2.1.4 Function-differentiated command list  
Tables 2.1.4.1(a) and (b) show the function-differentiated command list for the ICE.  
Table 2.1.4.1(a) Function-differentiated command list  
Command  
configuration  
Item  
number  
Reference  
page  
Function  
Description of operation  
1
2
3
4
5
Assemble  
#A,a  
Assemble command mnemonic code and store at  
address "a"  
Contents of addresses a1 to a2 are disassembled  
and displayed  
Contents of program area a1 to a2 are displayed  
Content of data area a1 to a2 are displayed  
Data d is set in addresses a1 to a2 (program area)  
Data d is set in addresses a1 to a2 (data area)  
Program is executed from the "a" address  
Execution time and step counter selection  
On-the-fly display selection  
Executes program while displaying results of step  
instruction from "a" address  
Displays only the final step of #T,a,n  
Sets Break at program address "a"  
Breakpoint is canceled  
Break condition is set for data RAM  
Breakpoint is canceled  
Break condition is set for evaluation board CPU internal registers VIII-54  
Breakpoint is canceled  
Combined break conditions set for program  
data RAM address and registers  
Cancel combined break conditions for program  
data ROM address and registers  
All break conditions canceled  
Break condition displayed  
Enter break enable mode  
Enter break disable mode  
Set break stop/trace modes  
VIII-38  
VIII-20  
Disassemble #L,a1,a2  
Dump  
Fill  
#DP,a1,a2  
#DD,a1,a2  
#FP,a1,a2,d  
#FD,a1,a2,d  
#G,a  
#TIM  
#OTF  
#T,a,n  
VIII-22  
VIII-24  
VIII-40  
VIII-41  
VIII-60  
VIII-81  
VIII-82  
VIII-63  
Set  
Run Mode  
6
7
Trace  
Break  
#U,a,n  
#BA,a  
#BAR,a  
#BD  
#BDR  
#BR  
VIII-65  
VIII-52  
VIII-53  
#BRR  
#BM  
VIII-56  
#BMR  
#BRES  
#BC  
#BE  
#BSYN  
#BT  
VIII-59  
VIII-58  
VIII-66  
VIII-66  
VIII-67  
VIII-68  
VIII-42  
#BRKSEL,REM  
#MP,a1,a2,a3  
Set BA condition clear/remain modes  
Contents of program area addresses a1 to a2  
are moved to addresses a3 and after  
Contents of data area addresses a1 to a2 are  
moved to addresses a3 and after  
8
Move  
#MD,a1,a2,a3  
VIII-43  
9
Data Set  
#SP,a  
#SD,a  
Data from program area address "a" are written to memory VIII-44  
Data from data area address "a" are written to memory  
Display evaluation board CPU internal registers  
Set evaluation board CPU internal registers  
Reset evaluation board CPU  
VIII-45  
VIII-26  
VIII-46  
VIII-80  
VIII-35  
VIII-47  
10  
Change CPU #DR  
Internal  
Registers  
#SR  
#I  
#DXY  
#SXY  
Display X, Y, MX and MY  
Set data for X and Y display and MX, MY  
VIII-4  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
Table 2.1.4.1(b) Function-differentiated command list  
Command  
configuration  
Item  
number  
Reference  
page  
Function  
Description of operation  
11  
History  
#H,p1,p2  
#HB  
#HG  
#HP  
#HPS,a  
#HC,S/C/E  
Display history data for pointer 1 and pointer 2  
Display upstream history data  
Display 21 line history data  
Display history pointer  
Set history pointer  
Sets up the history information acquisition  
before (S), before/after (C) and after (E)  
Sets up the history information acquisition  
from program area a1 to a2  
Sets up the prohibition of the history information  
acquisition from program area a1 to a2  
Indicates history acquisition program area  
Retrieves and indicates the history information  
which executed a program address "a"  
Retrieves and indicates the history information  
which wrote or read the data area address "a"  
Move program file to memory  
VIII-27  
VIII-30  
VIII-30  
VIII-33  
VIII-33  
VIII-48  
#HA,a1,a2  
VIII-49  
VIII-49  
#HAR,a1,a2  
#HAD  
#HS,a  
VIII-49  
VIII-32  
#HSW,a  
#HSR,a  
VIII-32  
12  
File  
#RF,file  
#RFD,file  
#VF,file  
#VFD,file  
#WF,file  
#WFD,file  
#CL,file  
#CS,file  
#OPTLD,n,file  
#CVD  
VIII-70  
VIII-70  
VIII-71  
VIII-71  
VIII-72  
VIII-72  
VIII-73  
VIII-73  
VIII-74  
VIII-36  
VIII-36  
VIII-76  
VIII-77  
Move data file to memory  
Compare program file and contents of memory  
Compare data file and contents of memory  
Save contents of memory to program file  
Save contents of memory to data file  
Load ICE set condition from file  
Save ICE set condition to file  
Load HEXA data from file  
Indicates coverage information  
Clears coverage information  
13  
14  
Coverage  
#CVR  
ROM Access #RP  
#VP  
Move contents of ROM to program memory  
Compare contents of ROM with contents of  
program memory  
#ROM  
#Q  
Set ROM type  
Terminate ICE and return to operating system control  
VIII-78  
VIII-83  
15  
16  
17  
Terminate  
ICE  
Command  
Display  
Self  
#HELP  
#CHK  
Display ICE instruction  
VIII-86  
VIII-34  
Report results of ICE self diagnostic test  
Diagnosis  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-5  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
2.1.5 Alphabetical listing of commands  
Tables 2.1.5.1(a) and (b) show an alphabetical listing of ICE commands.  
Table 2.1.5.1(a) Alphabetical listing of commands  
Command  
configuration  
Item  
number  
Reference  
page  
Description of operation  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
#A,a  
Assemble mnemonic instruction and store in address "a"  
Set break at program address "a"  
Cancel breakpoint  
VIII-38  
VIII-52  
VIII-52  
VIII-58  
VIII-53  
VIII-53  
VIII-66  
VIII-56  
#BA,a  
#BAR,a  
#BC  
#BD  
#BDR  
#BE  
Display break condition  
Set break condition for RAM data  
Cancels the data RAM break condition  
Break enable mode  
Assign multiple break condition for program address, RAM data  
and registers  
#BM  
9
#BMR  
Cancels the multiple break condition  
Break condition set for evaluation board CPU registers  
Cancels the register break condition  
All break conditions canceled  
Sets BA clear/remain modes  
Break disable mode  
VIII-56  
VIII-54  
VIII-54  
VIII-59  
VIII-68  
VIII-66  
VIII-67  
VIII-34  
VIII-73  
VIII-73  
VIII-36  
VIII-36  
VIII-24  
VIII-22  
VIII-26  
VIII-35  
VIII-41  
VIII-40  
VIII-60  
VIII-27  
10 #BR  
11 #BRR  
12 #BRES  
13 #BRKSEL,REM  
14 #BSYN  
15 #BT  
Sets break stop/trace mode  
16 #CHK  
Reports results of ICE self diagnostic tests  
Loads ICE set condition from file  
Saves ICE set condition to file  
Indicates coverage information  
Clears coverage information  
Displays contents of addresses a1 to a2 in the data area  
Displays contents of addresses a1 to a2 in the program area  
Displays evaluation board CPU internal registers  
Displays X, Y and MX, MY  
Sets d to addresses a1 to a2 in the data area  
Sets d to addresses a1 to a2 in the program area  
Executes the program from the "a" address  
Displays history data for pointers 1 and 2  
17 #CL,file  
18 #CS,file  
19 #CVD  
20 #CVR  
21 #DD,a1,a2  
22 #DP,a1,a2  
23 #DR  
24 #DXY  
25 #FD,a1,a2,d  
26 #FP,a1,a2,d  
27 #G,a  
28 #H,p1,p2  
29 #HA,a1,a2  
30 #HAD  
Sets up the history information acquisition from program area a1 to a2 VIII-49  
Indicates the history acquisition program area  
Sets up the prohibition of the history information acquisition  
from program area a1 to a2  
VIII-49  
VIII-49  
31 #HAR,a1,a2  
32 #HB  
33 #HC,S/C/E  
Displays upstream history data  
VIII-30  
VIII-48  
Sets up the history information acquisition before  
(S), before/after (C) and after (E) the break hit  
Display ICE instructions  
34 #HELP  
35 #HG  
VIII-86  
VIII-30  
Display history data in 21 lines  
VIII-6  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
Table 2.1.5.1(b) Alphabetical listing of commands  
Command  
configuration  
Item  
number  
Reference  
page  
Description of operation  
Display history pointer  
Set history pointer  
Retrieves and indicates the history information which executed  
the program address "a"  
36 #HP  
VIII-33  
VIII-33  
VIII-32  
37 #HPS,a  
38 #HS,a  
39 #HSR,a  
40 #HSW,a  
Retrieves and indicates the history information which read the  
data area address "a"  
Retrieves and indicates the history information which wrote the  
data area address "a"  
VIII-32  
VIII-32  
41 #I  
42 #L,a1,a2  
43 #MD,a1,a2,a3  
Reset evaluation board CPU  
VIII-80  
VIII-20  
VIII-43  
Display disassembled contents of addresses a1 to a2  
Move contents of data area addresses a1 to a2 to address a3  
and after  
44 #MP,a1,a2,a3  
Move contents of program area addresses a1 to a2 to address a3  
and after  
VIII-42  
45 #OPTLD,n,file  
46 #OTF  
47 #Q  
48 #RF,file  
49 #RFD,file  
50 #ROM  
51 #RP  
52 #SD,a  
53 #SP,a  
Load HEXA data from file  
Select on-the-fly display  
Terminate ICE and return to operating system control  
Move program file to memory  
Move data file to memory  
VIII-74  
VIII-82  
VIII-83  
VIII-70  
VIII-70  
VIII-78  
VIII-76  
VIII-45  
VIII-44  
VIII-46  
VIII-47  
VIII-63  
VIII-81  
VIII-65  
VIII-71  
VIII-71  
VIII-77  
VIII-72  
VIII-72  
Select ROM type  
Move ROM contents to program memory  
Write data from address "a" of the data area  
Write data from address "a" of the program area  
Set evaluation board CPU internal registers  
Display X, Y and set data to MX, MY  
Execute while displaying n step instruction results from address "a"  
Select execution time and step counter  
Display only final step of #T,a,n  
Compare program file and memory contents  
Compare data file and memory contents  
Compare contents of ROM and contents of program memory  
Save content of memory to the program file  
Save content of memory to the data file  
54 #SR  
55 #SXY  
56 #T,a,n  
57 #TIM  
58 #U,a,n  
59 #VF,file  
60 #VFD,file  
61 #VP  
62 #WF,file  
63 #WFD,file  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-7  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
2.2 Connecting and Starting the System  
The ICE connects to common personal computers and the S1C62 Family evaluation board for operation, as  
shown in Figure 2.2.1. The connection sequence described below should be followed.  
Host computer  
(IBM PC/AT)  
Target board  
ICE  
Evaluation Board  
S5U1C62xxxE  
RS-232C  
S5U1C62000H  
Fig. 2.2.1 System connection diagram  
(1) Verify Power OFF Status  
Make sure the power sources for the personal computer and ICE are switched OFF. (The S1C62 Family  
evaluation board is powered by the ICE power supply and thus has no power source.)  
(2) Cable Connections  
Connect cables in the manner prescribed in the "S5U1C62000H Manual".  
(3) Power ON  
Switch ON the power supplies for the personal computer and the ICE in any order.  
2.2.1 HOST settings  
The ICE is connected to a general purpose personal computer for operation.  
The ICS62XX system program has an approximately 140KB capacity, and the personal computer must be  
set to proper operating parameters for the ICS62XX to operate. An example follows.  
Program Capacity  
The ICS62XX system program requires a host system with a RAM capacity of about 140KB.  
RS232C Settings  
ICE Operation Using a PC/XT, PC/AT System with PC-DOS v. 2.10  
Execute MODE command soon after starting PC-DOS.  
Setting:  
A>MODE COM1:4800,n,8,1,P  
COM1:4800,n,8,1,P  
A>  
... Settings can be confirmed.  
Set the ICE baud rate to 4800.  
VIII-8  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
2.2.2 Starting the ICS62XX  
Start the Operating System  
First, call up the operating system (abbreviated OS below) for your general purpose personal computer.  
The ICS62XX can operate in the following OS environments.  
PC-DOS version 2.10 or higher  
Refer to your OS manual for procedures on loading the system. After loading the system, set the HOST  
setting as described in Section 2.2.1, "HOST settings".  
Starting the ICS62XX  
(1) Insert the ICS62XX system software (supplied with CD-ROM) to the assigned drive in your personal  
computer.  
(2) Input the following information through the keyboard.  
B>ICS62XX  
...The Epson logo is displayed for about one second...  
* ICE POWER ON RESET *  
* DIAGNOSTIC TEST OK *  
# _  
Cursor position  
When the ICS62XX system program is loaded in the computer as described above, control of the  
computer is given to the ICS62XX system program. ICS62XX commands are awaited when the program  
is properly loaded and the # mark is displayed.  
Quitting ICS62XX Control  
The ICS62XX program is terminated by entering the Q command; control is then returned to the  
computer's operating system.  
#Q  
B>  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-9  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
2.3 S5U1C62000H Operation and Functions  
ICE operations, details on functions and emulation limitations are discussed in this section.  
2.3.1 Operating features  
Figure 2.3.1.1 shows a block  
ICE control  
processor  
diagram of ICE functions.  
Emulation control portion  
The ICE has a built-in control  
Emulation program memory  
RS-232C host  
interface  
processor which processes ICE  
Emulation data memory  
Evaluation board  
interface  
commands.  
History control portion  
Emulation consists of executing  
and terminating functions of the  
Target monitor portion  
Break control portion  
To the evaluation board  
evaluation boardCPU and is  
ICE firmware  
controlled via the emulation  
ROM sockets (H, L)  
control portion. The evaluation  
board CPU is halted unless the  
Fig. 2.3.1.1 Block diagram of ICE functions  
run (G command) or single step  
(T command) operations are  
invoked. In this condition the  
emulation lamp on the ICE display is OFF and the HALT lamp is ON to indicate the set-up mode. Thus, the  
A command, etc., are executed during the set-up mode.  
The emulation program memory is set-up by instructions which activate the evaluation board CPU.  
In the set-up mode, such operations as loading from the ROM sockets by the ICE control processor and  
program setting by the host processor are executed.  
Similarly, the evaluation board CPU data RAM is allocated to the emulation data memory.  
The history control portion records the execution bus cycles of the evaluation board CPU and consists of a  
8192 word × 88 bit memory. The large memory capacity allows evaluation board CPU register values to be  
recorded in real time. The history is written in target run mode, and is analyzed by the ICE control  
processor in the set-up mode.  
The break control portion has the functions which check the evaluation board CPU bus condition whether  
it is at a break point or not, and will stop the execution at the break point. Breaking at CPU register values  
is also possible in real time. The ICE control processor monitors the evaluation board CPU on the target  
monitor during target run mode. Results are displayed as on-the-fly information.  
2.3.2 Break mode and break function  
Breaks are supported in many modes.  
(1) Break enable mode:  
Makes the break function valid. Actions during break are decided according to the mode setting of  
break-trace/ stop.  
(2) Break disable mode:  
Makes the break function invalid. ICE SYNC pin pulse output mode which does not terminate the G  
command when in break condition. This function can be used as an oscilloscope synchronous signal to  
measure the target circuit timing using the pulse as a reference.  
(3) Break trace mode:  
Temporarily stops the target run during break condition, and quickly restarts the program after  
displaying the CPU register and execution time. Effective for viewing the program operation timing,  
but not in true real time.  
(4) Break stop mode:  
A mode to break programs when they are consistent with break conditions.  
VIII-10  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
Different types of breaks are described below.  
(1) Reset switch:  
Need not be in break mode to break. Used to reset the ICE; does not display the target register during  
break.  
(2) Break switch:  
Need not be in break mode to break. evaluation board CPU register is properly displayed during break.  
(3) ESC key:  
Break induced by ESC key input from the host. Need not be in break mode to break. Evaluation board  
CPU register is properly displayed during break.  
(4) Break set command:  
Break induced when CPU conditions and conditions set by BA, BD, BR or BM commands agree. Causes  
a break in break enable mode and break stop mode, but does not cause break in break disable mode.  
Cannot be set in break trace mode after completion of the instruction.  
Table 2.3.2.1 shows the break modes and break types.  
Table 2.3.2.1 Break modes and break types  
Item  
Break mode  
Break method  
Description  
Break enable  
& break stop  
* Reset switch  
* Break switch  
* ESC key  
* Break instruction  
* Reset switch  
* Break switch  
* ESC key  
Normal use mode.  
Start up mode at power on.  
Evaluation board CPU runs in real time by entering  
GO command after setting this mode.  
Activates the break trace function.  
1
Break enable  
& break trace  
2
3
4
This mode is set by the BE command or BT command.  
Register data is displayed when the evaluation board CPU  
agrees with the conditions set by the break set instruction.  
Evaluation board CPU does not run in real time when  
GO command is entered after setting this mode.  
The SYNC output function is executed.  
A pulse is output to the SYNC pin via the BSYN  
command when the CPU agrees with the condition  
set by the break set instruction.  
Evaluation board CPU runs in real time by entering  
GO command after setting this mode.  
Automatically sets to break disable and break trace.  
Break enable mode is automatically set when break  
trace is set.  
Break disable  
& break stop  
* Reset switch  
* Break switch  
* ESC key  
Break disable  
& break trace  
____  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-11  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
2.3.3 SYNC pin and HALT pin output  
Evaluation board  
clock  
(1) SYNC Pin Output  
When the instruction cycle  
conforms to a break condition,  
a low level pulse is output by  
the first half of the subsequent  
instruction fetch cycle.  
Fetch signal  
Instruction cycle  
SYNC output  
5 clock instruction  
Correspond to  
break condition  
About 1 µsec (clock 455 kHz)  
About 15.6 µsec (clock 32 kHz)  
Fig. 2.3.3.1 SYNC pin output  
(2) HALT Pin Output  
A low level pulse is output  
when the evaluation board  
CPU is stopped (e.g., when  
the HALT or SLP instructions  
are executed).  
HALT output  
Fig. 2.3.3.2 HALT pin output  
Indicate the CPU halt  
2.3.4 Display during run mode and during break  
During run mode, the ICE control processor monitors the state of the evaluation board CPU. Monitored  
data evaluation board CPU's executed program are displayed at intervals of about 500 msec when the on-  
the-fly display mode is set (by the OTF command).  
#G  
*PC=0120  
*PC=HALT  
*PC=0200  
. . . Underlined portion is displayed in succession.  
. . . Enter HALT mode, line feed, and HALT is displayed.  
. . . HALT is canceled, operation is restarted, and PC is redisplayed.  
Note HALT indicates execution of the HALT or SLP instruction.  
When the printer is online and started, the PC values are printed in succession. PC is not displayed  
during on-the-fly inhibit mode.  
During a break, the cause of the break, post break PC (the next executed program address), the  
contents of the CPU registers, and execution time are displayed.  
#G  
*PC=xxxx  
*EMULATION END STATUS=BREAK HIT  
*PC=0201 A=0 B=0 X=070 Y=071 F=IDZC SP=10  
*RUN TIME=425.097mS  
. . . (1)  
. . . (2)  
. . . (3)  
(1) There are three statuses possible after completing the emulation: BREAK HIT, ESC KEY, OR BREAK  
SW. When a number of conditions prevail, only the highest priority position is displayed in the follow-  
ing priority ranking: BREAK SW > ESC KEY > BREAK HIT. A break may also be initiated by the reset  
switch; a reset switch break causes " *ICE6200 RESET SW TARGET*" to be displayed and  
instructions are awaited. The register display and execution time display are not active in this mode.  
(2) The displayed PC shows the next executed value. Register values following "A" indicate the values  
during a break. In the above example, the values (indicated 2) results from completing to execute the  
instruction of address 0200.  
VIII-12  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
(3) Execution time mode and step number mode can be set during run time (using the #TIM command).  
Millisecond is abbreviated to "mS". In step number mode, decimal values describe the run time, as in :  
" *RUN TIME=501 STEPS".  
When the execution time or step counters overflow, the message " *RUN TIME=TIMEOVER" is  
displayed. For more details, see Section 2.3.10, "Measurement during command execution".  
2.3.5 Break assigning commands  
The ICE has a variety of break setting functions.  
(1) Set break by PC:  
Set by the BA command. The instruction is executed when the evaluation board CPU PC and the set  
values agree, thus inducing a break. When the PSET command is entered at the set address, the PSET  
and subsequent instruction are executed, then processing is halted. (When multiple PSET commands  
are specified, the instructions are executed until a command other than PSET is encountered.)  
Breaks can be set for multiple PC's (to the maximum capacity of program memory).  
(2) Set break by RAM data:  
Set by the BD command. A break is induced by the RAM data address, data, or R/ W AND condition.  
Also, masks can be set for address, data and R/ W respectively.  
When a break is induced by writing F data at address 10, the settings are: address=10, data=F, R/ W=W.  
Any data can be used with the following settings: address=10, data=mask, R/ W=W. A break will occur  
after execution of the memory access instruction which equals the set conditions. The break point can be  
set to one point through these settings.  
(3) Set break by register value:  
Set by BR command. When the register values of the evaluation board CPU coincide with the set break  
values, a break is initiated following execution of the instruction.  
A break is induced by and AND condition set in the A, B, FI, FD, FZ, FC, X, or Y registers. Also, a mask  
can be set in any of the registers. When a break is induced with register A=5, X=70, and Y=0A, the other  
registers may be masked.  
Example:  
LD A,5  
LD X,70  
LD Y,0A . . . A break is induced when the above instruction is executed.  
These settings will allow the operation to run in real time. The break point can be set at only one point.  
Items (1), (2) and (3) above can be set independently.  
When BA, BD and BR are set concurrently, a break will occur when any of the conditions coincide.  
(4) Set compound break:  
Set by BM command. A compound break occurs when breaks (1), (2) and (3) include AND statements.  
Breaks can have the following elements masked: (coincide with PC), (coincide with RAM data address,  
data, R/ W), (register value). The break point can be set at only one point. At the current setting, setting  
(1) through (3) are automatically canceled. If settings (1) through (3) follow the current setting, the BM  
condition is canceled.  
Note Since the RAM data condition is a break element, the break will not be initiated without instructions  
which access the RAM data.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-13  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
2.3.6 Target interrupt and break  
When a target interrupt occurs the moment of a break it is given priority over the break. The break is then  
induced after the interrupt process is stacked. Next, the interrupt routine is executed from the top when the  
run mode commences.  
The PC displayed during a break is the top interrupt address.  
When a break is set by the BR command with FI=1, the break and interrupt are generated simultaneously,  
but due to the interrupt process, the register values after the break are:  
*PC=0000 A=.... F=.DZC X=000 Y=010  
|
FI reset  
so as to reset the FI flag status.  
2.3.7 History function  
The evaluation board CPU information (PC, instruction code, RAM data address and data content, and  
CPU internal registers) while running an emulation are fetched to the history memory region with each  
CPU bus cycle. The history memory has a capacity of 8291 cycles, and can store 2730 (5 clock instructions  
only) to 1365 (12 clock instructions only) new instructions executed by the evaluation board.  
History memory  
History memory  
Oldest instruction  
(HP=0)  
Effective  
history  
(HP=2730)  
Instruction  
immediately  
prior to break  
Effective  
history  
Oldest instruction  
(HP=0)  
Program  
execution  
Instruction  
immediately  
prior to break  
(HP=700)  
Effective  
history  
Space  
Fig. 2.3.7.1 History function diagram  
Figure 2.3.7.1 shows a diagram of the history function. When the history memory is filled, old data is  
overwritten by new data.  
The history pointer (HP) normally displays the oldest instruction at position 0, but during a break it  
displays the newest instruction. The maximum value of the HP is about 2730 when 5 clock instructions are  
executed.  
History data  
HP=0  
Oldest  
instruction  
The HP can display optional positions via the H, HB,  
and HG commands.  
HP data from 1980 to 1986 is displayed by entering:  
#H, 1980, 1986  
Newest  
instruction  
HP=2700  
Fig. 2.3.7.2 History data display  
VIII-14  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
#H, 1980, 1986  
LOC PC IR OP OPR. A B X Y IDZC MEMORY OPERATION  
1980 0200 FC1 PUSH B 0 0 03F 03F 1111 W010=0  
OTHER  
1981 0201 423 CALL 23 0 0 03F 03F 1111 W00F=8 W00E=0 W00D=2  
. . . (1)  
1982 0223 FDF RET  
0 0 03F 03F 1111 R00D=2 R00E=0 R00F=8  
0 0 03F 03F 1111 R010=0  
1983 0202 FD1 PDP B  
* 1984  
W010=8 W00F=0 W00E=2 INT1  
INT2  
1985  
1986 00FE FFF NOP7  
0 0 0FF 0FF 0111  
(a)  
(b)  
(c)  
(d)  
(e)  
(f)  
(g)  
(h)  
(a) History pointer displayed  
(b) Executed instruction address displayed  
(c) Instruction code displayed  
(d) Mnemonic instruction displayed  
(e) Register value displayed when instruction completed  
(f) When each flag is set, 1 is reset to 0 and displayed  
(g) When a data memory R/ W operation occurs during execution of an instruction, the data  
sequence write 8 to 0F address write 0 to 0E address write 2 to 0D address is sequentially  
displayed (1).  
(h) During the interrupt process, INT1 (stack) and INT2 (vector) are displayed. The INT1 memory  
operation indicates the stack cycle.  
Note * During interrupt processing, two HP are renewed. Otherwise, HP is renewed by the instruction  
unit.  
2.3.8 Break delay function  
Users can refer to the programs until break by the history function mentioned in the previous section. In  
the ICE this function has been expanded so that the history information before hitting the break condition  
or before and after hitting break condition can be acquired and referred. To realize this function, this  
system is designed not to terminate the program right after the hit of break condition, but to terminate the  
program after acquiring specified history data. This specification is executed by the #HC command.  
Note When specifying the break delay by using the break enable & break stop mode (see Section 2.3.2,  
"Break mode and break function"), be sure that break is not made at the specified break condition.  
2.3.9 Coverage function  
ICE can acquire and indicate the address information of the program which was accessed during the  
execution of the program. One can confirm which parts have completed troubleshooting and debugging by  
referring to coverage information which is a result of executing programs for a long period of time. This  
coverage function is specified by #CVD, and #CVR commands.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-15  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
2.3.10 Measurement during command execution  
The ICS62XX possesses a counting function which counts the time or the number of steps from starting the  
target program to the occurrence of a break.  
The counting range is described below.  
(1) Time counting mode  
6.5 µsec to 6.5 × 65535 µsec (=425.977 msec)  
Measurement error : ±6.5 µsec  
(The display is in millisecond units: msec)  
(2) Step counting mode  
Step 1 to step 65535  
Measurement error : 0 steps  
(error of 1 step may be presumed during interrupt process)  
When the measurement range is exceeded, the following message is displayed:  
*RUN TIME=TIMEOVER.  
2.3.11 Self-diagnostic function  
The ICE performs a self-check at power ON. When a check instruction (#CHK ) is input from the host  
system, the self-test results are sent to the host.  
#CHK  
#
...System awaits instruction unless an error occurs.  
A check instruction is automatically input when the ICS62XX system program is loaded.  
B>ICS62XX  
(Epson logo appears)  
* ICE POWER ON RESET *  
* DIAGNOSTIC TEST OK *  
#
(Check instruction is automatically input; if no anomaly occurs, the  
following message appears)  
When the above display appears, it indicates that the ICE and host are connected properly and the ICE is  
operating correctly.  
If the ICE is power supply is OFF or the the cable to the host is not connected at the prompt, the following  
message appears:  
B>ICS62XX  
*COMMUNICATION ERROR OR ICE NOT READY*  
Then, when the ICE power supply is switched ON, a self-test is automatically performed and the following  
message is displayed:  
* ICE POWER ON RESET *  
* DIAGNOSTIC TEST OK *  
#
When an error message is displayed after entering the check instruction, it is likely to be due to hardware  
failure. Contact customer support.  
VIII-16  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
2.3.12 Starting the printer  
The printer is controlled by the operating system. The printer can be started and stopped by entering  
"CTRL"+"P" key even while the ICS62XX system is running.  
#BA,100  
#"CTRL"+"P" T  
. . . The monitor display following the "CTRL"+"P" key input is printed.  
. . . SP=010  
PC=300 IR=FFF  
:
:
#"CTRL"+"P"  
. . . Stops the printer  
2.3.13 Limitations during emulation  
When running emulations with the ICE and evaluation board connected, the evaluation board CPU is  
normally stopped, as described in Section 2.3.1, "Operating features" (set up mode).  
In the set up mode, the evaluation board CPU and peripherals are stopped, and inappropriate operations  
cannot be initiated. Until the set up mode is canceled and the target program is executed, the evaluation  
board CPU executes instructions provided by the command program of the ICE. The command program  
continues to operate when the emulation is completed and returns to the set up mode.  
CPU operation  
(Evaluation board)  
About 30 step  
About 30 step  
Execute the emulation  
Prepare mode  
(CPU halt)  
Prepare mode  
(Running the target program)  
Fig. 2.3.13.1 Evaluation board CPU operation  
You should be aware that when the command program takes over, the timers and counters are enabled and  
started from initial settings. Also, the watchdog timer is cleared immediately prior to the ICE switching to  
emulation mode while under command program control.  
Accordingly, the following points should be noted when using the ICE.  
(1) When execution of the trace instruction (T,U) is prolonged  
Evaluation board timer values can be renewed while the command program is operative.  
(2) When the run is halted and restarted  
The watchdog timer is cleared by the ICE before and after the emulation, thus the watchdog timer is not  
continuous. The target program operates in real time when the run time is sufficiently long.  
The command program runs approximately 30 steps before and after an emulation. When operating at 32  
kHz clock speed, these steps require 6 msec + 6 msec = 12 msec. While at a clock speed of 455 kHz, the  
command program steps before and after emulation require 400 µsec + 400 µsec = 800 µsec.  
When the dump data command (#DD) is invoked, the I/ O area interrupt condition flag is read but not  
cleared.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-17  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
3 COMMAND DETAILS  
Detailed particulars on ICE commands and explanations of functions are described in this section.  
Commands are divided into six categories.  
DISPLAY:  
SET:  
This command group displays the contents of program memory and data memory, and  
history information.  
This group of commands modifies the contents of memory (program and data  
memories).  
BREAK and GO: Sets break conditions and starts emulations.  
FILE:  
ROM:  
Controls transfer of files from the host to the ICE.  
Controls the transfer of program memory and ROM (high and low) used by the evalua-  
tion board CPU.  
CONTROL:  
Sets the ICE operation mode (including initialization of the target system).  
An S1C6S3N7/ 6S3B7/ 6S3L7 program is used in the examples, but output error messages may differ with  
the type of device used.  
The methods for entering instructions described in Section 3.1 are as follows:  
• A # mark is displayed when the program awaits instructions.  
• Upper and lower case letters may be used to enter instructions.  
• Individual instructions delineated by < > marks in the text should be separated by a comma when  
entering instructions.  
• Interactive instructions imbeded in commands are displayed by key input. The interactive portions of  
instructions in the following examples are underlined in the text.  
• The toggle instruction is set to reverse upon each command input.  
Notes indicates points for caution when using the described commands.  
VIII-18  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
3.1 Display Command Group  
L
DISASSEMBLE LIST ..................................................... VIII-20  
DP  
DUMP PROGRAM ........................................................ VIII-22  
DUMP DATA RAM ....................................................... VIII-24  
DISPLAY CPU REGISTER ........................................... VIII-26  
HISTORY DATA DISPLAY ........................................... VIII-27  
HISTORY DATA DISPLAY BACKWARD .................... VIII-30  
HISTORY DATA DISPLAY FORWARD ...................... VIII-30  
HISTORY SEARCH PC ................................................. VIII-32  
HISTORY SEARCH MEMORY READ ......................... VIII-32  
HISTORY SEARCH MEMORY WRITE ....................... VIII-32  
HISTORY POINTER DISPLAY ..................................... VIII-33  
HISTORY POINTER SET.............................................. VIII-33  
CHECK ICE HARDWARE............................................ VIII-34  
DISPLAY X, Y REGISTER & MX, MY CONTENT .. VIII-35  
DISPLAY COVERAGE................................................... VIII-36  
RESET COVERAGE....................................................... VIII-36  
DD  
DR  
H
HB  
HG  
HS  
HSR  
HSW  
HP  
HPS  
CHK  
DXY  
CVD  
CVR  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-19  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
L
DISASSEMBLE LIST  
Format  
#L,<address 1>,<address 2>  
#L,<address 1>  
#L  
Function  
The program area (emulation program memory) is displayed disassembled from  
<address 1> to <address 2>.  
(1) When <address 2> defaults, a single screen (22 lines) is displayed disassembled.  
(2) When <address 1> and <address 2> default, a single screen is displayed disassembled from  
the previous address plus one (one more than the previous address).  
With only L input after power on, the data from address 0 onward is displayed.  
(3) When more than a single screen is displayed disassembled, a single line space appears  
between each 22 lines with about a one second pause.  
(4) The instruction can be interrupted by hitting the "ESC" key.  
Program area (for S1C6S3N7/6S3B7/6S3L7)  
000  
Address 1 . . . 100  
The instruction code and mnemonic  
for this area is displayed.  
Address 2 . . . 2FF  
3FF  
VIII-20  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
DISASSEMBLE LIST  
L
Format  
#L,<address 1>,<address 2>  
#L,<address 1>  
#L  
#L,100,1FF  
... Contents of addresses 100 to 1FF of the program are  
Examples  
0100 FDF RET  
0101 2FF JP C,FF  
: : :  
displayed disassembled  
01FF FFF NOP7  
#L,200  
... Contents from address 200 onward (22 lines) are displayed  
0200 E00 LD A,0  
0201 E6F LDPX MX,F  
: : :  
0215 FFF NOP7  
#L  
... One more than the previous address at which the program  
0216 FDF RET  
0217 E05 LD A,5  
: : :  
stopped are displayed  
022B FFB NOP5  
#L,100,FFF  
0100 FDF RET  
: : :  
0201 E6F LDPX MX,F  
... Interrupt via "ESC" key input  
#L,100,50  
* COMMAND ERROR * ... Address 1 > address 2 error  
#L,100,100  
0100 FDF RET  
... Contents of address 100 are disassembled, and executed  
normally  
#L,3FC  
03FC E00 LD A,0  
:
03FF 20F JP C,F  
... Last program area (3FF address in the case of S1C6S3N7/  
6S3B7/6S3L7) is passed, and instruction terminates  
#
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-21  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
DP  
DUMP PROGRAM  
Format  
#DP,<address 1>,<address 2>  
#DP,<address 1>  
#DP  
Function  
The program area (emulation program memory) from <address 1> to <address 2> is displayed  
in hexadecimal format.  
(1) When <address 2> defaults, the contents of <address 1> are displayed in a single screen (21  
lines, 21×8=168 addresses).  
(2) When <address 1> and <address 2> default, a single screen is displayed from the previous  
address plus one (one more than the previous address).  
When DP alone is entered after power on, the data from address 0 are displayed.  
(3) When more than one screen of data is displayed, a one line space appears between every  
21 lines with about a one second pause.  
(4) Hexadecimal and ASCII codes can be displayed together, but the ASCII data operands  
are converted by the RETD and LBPX instructions before display.  
Example:  
Data content 142 ... ASCII display B  
(Instruction: RETD 42)  
(5) When the last program area passes, the operation terminates.  
(6) Commands can be interrupted by input from the "ESC" key.  
Program area (for S1C6S3N7/6S3B7/6S3L7)  
000  
Address 1 . . . 100  
Program data from this area are  
displayed.  
Address 2 . . . 2FF  
3FF  
VIII-22  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
DUMP PROGRAM  
DP  
Format  
#DP,<address 1>,<address 2>  
#DP,<address 1>  
#DP  
#DP,104,121  
ADDR 0  
0100  
... Specified area is displayed  
Examples  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 ASCII  
FFF FFB 930 142 ..0B  
0108 FFF FFF FFF FFF FFB 931 142 944 .....1BD  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0118 FFF FFF FFF FFF FFB FFB FFB FFB ........  
0120 131 145  
1E  
#DP  
... 21 lines are displayed  
ADDR 0  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 ASCII  
0120  
131 132 145 FFF FFB FFB  
12E...  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
21 line display  
#DP,0,FFF  
ADDR 0  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 ASCII  
0000 FFF FFF FFF FFF FFF FFF FFF FFF .......  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
... Command interrupt via "ESC" key input  
#DP,100,50  
* COMMAND ERROR *  
... Address 1 > address 2 error  
#DP,400,FFF  
* COMMAND ERROR *  
... Error due to exceeding maximum value of program  
area (3FF address in the case of S1C6S3N7/6S3B7/6S3L7)  
#
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-23  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
DD  
DUMP DATA RAM  
Format  
#DD,<address 1>,<address 2>  
#DD,<address 1>  
#DD  
Function  
Data in the RAM area from <address 1> to <address 2> are displayed in hexadecimal format.  
(1) When <address 2> defaults, the contents of <address 1> are displayed in a single screen (21  
lines or the last RAM address).  
(2) When <address 1> and <address 2> default, a single screen is displayed from the previous  
address plus one (one more than the previous address). When DD alone is entered after  
power on, the data from address 0 are displayed.  
(3) The contents from the WRITE ONLY I/ O area cannot be read.  
(4) The I/ O address with mixed R/ W data is read and displayed with a ! mark.  
(5) Commands can be interrupted by input from the "ESC" key.  
00  
Data RAM  
Address 1 . . . 4F  
Data from this area is displayed  
LCD RAM  
Address 2 . . . AF  
I/ O area  
FD  
(for S1C6S3N7/6S3B7/6S3L7)  
#DD,80,BE  
Examples  
ADDR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F  
0080 5 2 3 4 A B B C D 0 F F F F F F  
0090 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
00A0 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ... Write only area is displayed  
00B0 5 A 3 F 0 5 6 F 4 4 4 0 5 A A  
#DD,100,FFF  
* COMMAND ERROR *  
... Error results when RAM address exceeds 7E  
(in the case of S1C6S3N7/6S3B7/6S3L7)  
#DD,0  
ADDR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F  
0000 F F F F F 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 3  
:
:
:
:
00AF 5 A 3 F 0 5 6 F 4 4 4 0 5 A A  
... 21 lines or last RAM address is displayed  
VIII-24  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
DUMP DATA RAM  
DD  
Format  
#DD,<address 1>,<address 2>  
#DD,<address 1>  
#DD  
#DD  
... Display again from address 0 since last address  
Examples  
exceeded (same as "#DD,0 ")  
#DD,50,40  
* COMMAND ERROR *  
... Address 1 > address 2 error  
#DD,0,7E  
ADDR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F  
0000 F F F F F 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 3  
:
... Instruction terminated by "ESC" key input  
#DD,E40,F1F  
ADDR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F  
0E40 F 0 1 5 7 4 A 0 0 0 E F 3 2 0 1  
... When the unused area is one  
0E80 0 0 3 2 7 6 C 1 1 2 0 0 6 5 4 9  
0E90 1 5 7 6 C F 3 2 0 1 0 1 E A C 0  
0EA0 0 0 0 1 4 0 5 0 0 0 3 0 0 1 5 2  
0EBC 4 3 2 7 6 B A 0 1 5 D 3 2 7 4 3  
0EC0 5 5 4 1 0 2 3 6 0 0 0 1 5 6 7 F  
entire line, the display skips  
that line (for S1C6S460)  
0F00 ! ! ! ! ! ! / / / / / / / / / / ... When addresses in the displayed  
0F10 F 0 1 0 F F / / / / / / / / / /  
lines are unused they are displayed  
as slashes (for S1C6S460)  
#
Note  
The read operation is invalid when the I/ O address is set to write only.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-25  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
DR  
DISPLAY CPU REGISTER  
Format  
#DR  
Function  
Displays the value of the current register of the evaluation board CPU.  
(1) PC: Displays the address which starts the next emulation.  
(2) A, B, X, Y, F, SP: Displays the current value (break or after break value).  
(3) IR, Mnemonic: Displays the mnemonic code for the PC program area command code.  
#DR  
Example  
* PC=0100 IR=FFF NOP7 A=0 B=0 X=06F Y=03A F=IDZC SP=10  
|
#
Displays characters when F is set,  
or (.) mark when F is reset  
VIII-26  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
HISTORY DATA DISPLAY  
H
Format  
#H,<pointer 1>,<pointer 2>  
#H,<pointer 1>  
Function  
Displays history data.  
(1) Displays history data from <pointer 1> to <pointer 2>.  
(2) When <pointer 2> defaults, displays history data of <pointer 1> in 21 lines.  
(3) Numerals displayed in <pointer 1> and <pointer 2> are decimal, from 0 to 9999.  
(4) The following contents are displayed for each instruction:  
LOC:  
PC:  
IR:  
OP:  
OPR:  
History pointer (decimal)  
Program counter (hexadecimal)  
Command code (hexadecimal)  
Command mnemonic  
When a break, "PC" is displayed.  
Command operand  
A,B,X,Y: Contents of A, B (Xp, Xh, Xl), (Yp, Yh, Yl) registers  
IDZC:  
Other:  
Binary display of flag bit (1 when set, 0 when clear)  
During execution of an instruction, the memory R/ W cycle and data are  
displayed. Also, data interrupts INT1 (stack data) and INT2 are displayed  
(5) History memory has a capacity of 8192 bus cycles. One the other hand, the S1C62 Family  
has 5, 7 and 12 clock instructions. The 5 clock instructions require three bus cycles, 7 clock  
instructions require four bus cycles, and 12 clock instructions require six bus cycles. Thus,  
the final value of the history pointer is changed according to the executed instruction. The  
maximum final value of the execution time for only a 5 clock instruction is approximately  
2700, while the execution time for a 12 clock instruction is about 1300. When a break  
occurs before the history memory reaches the end, the last value of the history pointer is  
reduced.  
(6) The history memory receives new data until a break occurs. Old data is erased when  
number of executed GO commands exceeds 2700.  
(7) The top of the history pointer is 0. When the last value of <pointer 2> is set, the values are  
displayed to the last value.  
(8) When there are no history data (Before GO command, after GO command execution,  
during T command execution, or during HAR command execution), the following  
message is displayed:  
* NO HISTORY DATA *  
(9) The HB command can be used to view history data immediately prior to a break.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-27  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
H
HISTORY DATA DISPLAY  
Format  
#H,<pointer 1>,<pointer 2>  
#H,<pointer 1>  
#H,200,205  
... Set range displayed  
Examples  
LOC  
PC IR OP  
OPR. A B  
X
Y IDZC MEMORY OPERATION  
OTHER  
OTHER  
OTHER  
0200 0128 FDO POP A  
0201 0129 F70 DEC M0  
F 0 020 021 0011 R01F=0  
0 0 020 021 0010 R000=1 W000=0  
0202 012A 722 JP  
NZ,22 0 0 020 021 0010  
0203 012B F71 DEC M1  
0 0 020 021 0000 R001=2 W001=1  
M0,A 0 0 020 021 0000 W000=0  
... 21 lines displayed  
0204 012C 721 JP  
0205 0121 F80 LD  
NZ,21 0 0 020 021 0000  
#H,300  
LOC  
0300 000F C1F ADD B,OF F 4 02D 031 0001  
0301 0010 70E JP NZ,OE F 3 02D 031 0001  
0302 000E EE8 LDPX MX,A F 3 02D 031 0001 W02D=F  
PC IR OP  
OPR. A B  
X
Y IDZC MEMORY OPERATION  
:
:
:
:
:
0319 0124 E10 LD  
0320 0125 BD0 LD  
B,00 F 0 030 031 0001  
X,D0 F 0 010 031 0001  
#H,0,100  
LDC  
PC IR OP  
OPR. A B  
X
Y IDZC MEMORY OPERATION  
0000 0000 E1C LD  
0001 0001 E16 LD  
0002 0002 822 LD  
A,B 5 4 000 024 0000  
B,06 4 4 000 024 0000  
Y,22 4 6 000 022 0000  
4 6 000 022 0000  
0003 0003 EF0 INC Y  
0004 0004 EF3 LDPY A,MY 4 6 000 023 0000 R023=0  
0005 0005 90A LBPX MX,0A 0 6 001 024 0000 W000=A W001=0  
0006 0006 C05 ADD A,05 0 6 002 024 0000  
0007 0007 D52 SBC B,02 5 6 002 024 0000  
0008* 0008 17F RETD 7F  
5 4 003 024 0000 R01A=C R01B=9 R01C=1 W002=F W003=7  
* Instruction terminates after exceeding last history memory  
#H,310,3000  
LDC  
PC IR OP  
OPR. A B  
X
Y IDZC MEMORY OPERATION  
OTHER  
0310 0010 70E JP  
0311 0011 8F1 LD  
0312 0012 E38 LD  
NZ,0E F 0 020 021 0011  
Y,21 F 0 020 021 0011  
MY,08 F 0 020 021 0011 W021=8  
:
:
:
:
: : :  
:
:
2430 0172 E32 LD  
2431 0173 F48 EI  
2432 0174 FF8 HALT  
2433  
MY,02 7 6 024 026 0000 W026=2  
7 6 024 026 0000  
7 6 024 026 1000  
W01F=1 W01E=7 W01D=5 INT1  
INT2  
2434  
2435* 0108 0E6 JP  
E6  
7 6 024 026 0000  
... INT1 or INT2 displayed when interrupt only occurs  
VIII-28  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
HISTORY DATA DISPLAY  
H
Format  
#H,<pointer 1>,<pointer 2>  
#H,<pointer 1>  
#H,0,500  
Examples  
LOC  
PC IR OP  
OPR. A B  
X
Y IDZC MEMORY OPERATION  
OTHER  
0000 0010 70E JP  
NZ,0E F B 015 021 0001  
0001 000E EE8 LDPX MX,A F B 015 021 0001 W015=F  
0002 000F C1F ADD B,0F F B 016 021 0001  
0003 0010 70E JP  
NZ,0E F A 016 021 0001  
0004 000E EE8 LDPX MX,A F A 016 021 0001 W016=F  
0005 000F C1F ADD B,0F F A 017 021 0001  
0006 0010 70E JP  
NZ,0E F 9 017 021 0001  
0007 000E EE8 LDPX MX,A F 9 017 021 0001 W017=F  
0008 000F C1F ADD B,0F F 9 018 021 0001  
0009 0010 70E JP  
0010 000E EE8 LDPX MX,A F 8 018 021 0001 W018=F  
... Instruction terminated by "ESC" key input  
NZ,0E F 8 018 021 0001  
#
Note  
The history data register value is changed by the line following the instruction execution  
(limited to "LD X,x" and "LD Y,y").  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-29  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
HB, HG  
HISTORY DATA DISPLAY BACKWARD/FORWARD  
Format  
#HB  
#HG  
Function  
Indicates the history information before and after the history pointer.  
(1) HB: 21 instructions displayed from the current history pointer. The current pointer  
decrements 21 after display. (Validated in vicinity of last displayed history value.)  
(2) HG: 21 instructions displayed from the current history pointer. The current pointer  
increments 21 after display. (Validated from old displayed history value by a screen.)  
(3) The current history pointer indicates the last pointer after GO command completion.  
Current history pointer = last history pointer - 42  
(Second HB execution)  
Current history pointer = last history pointer - 21  
(First HB execution)  
Current history pointer = last history pointer  
(immediately after GO command)  
Displayed by HB  
Displayed by HB  
21 lines  
21 lines  
#BA,108  
Examples  
#G,R  
*PC=  
*PC=HALT  
*EMULATION END STATUS = BREAK HIT  
*PC=01E6 A=7 B=6 X=024 Y=026 F=.... SP=4D  
*RUN TIME=TIMEOVER  
#HB  
LOC  
PC IR OP  
OPR. A B  
X
Y IDZC MEMORY OPERATION  
OTHER  
2415 0423 83A LD  
2416 0424 CF1 OR  
2417 0425 FDF RET  
Y,3A 7 6 056 03A 0010  
MY,01 7 6 056 03A 0000 R03A=0 W03A=1  
7 6 056 03A 0000 R01D=6 R01E=6 R01F=1  
: : :  
:
:
:
:
:
:
2432 0174 FF8 HALT  
2433  
2434  
7 6 024 026 1000  
W01F=1 W01E=7 W01D=5 INT1  
INT2  
2435* 0108 0E6 JP  
E6  
7 6 024 026 0000  
... When an HB command is executed after a break hit, 21  
lines are displayed from the break address onward  
VIII-30  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
HISTORY DATA DISPLAY BACKWARD/FORWARD  
HB, HG  
Format  
#HB  
#HG  
#HPS,200  
Examples  
#HG  
LOC  
... 21 history pointer instructions displayed from 200  
OPR. A B Y IDZC MEMORY OPERATION OTHER  
PC IR OP  
X
0200 0128 FD0 POP A  
0201 0129 F70 DEC M0  
F 0 020 021 0011 R01F=0  
0 0 020 021 0010 R000=1 W000=0  
0202 012A 722 JP  
NZ,22 0 0 020 021 0010  
0203 012B F71 DEC M1  
0 0 020 021 0000 R001=2 W001=1  
:
:
:
:
: : :  
0218 000F C1F ADD B,0F F E 013 011 0001  
0219 0010 70E JP NZ,0E F D 013 011 0001  
:
:
0220 000E EE8 LDPX MX,A F D 013 011 0001 W013=F  
#HPS,200  
#HB  
LDC  
0180 000F C1F ADD B,0F F 6 03B 021 0001  
0181 0010 70E JP NZ,0E F 5 03B 021 0001  
... 21 history pointer instructions displayed from 200  
PC IR OP  
OPR. A B Y IDZC MEMORY OPERATION OTHER  
X
0182 000E EE8 LDPX MX,A F 5 03B 021 0001 W03B=F  
0183 000F C1F ADD B,0F F 5 03C 021 0001  
:
:
:
:
: : :  
:
:
0198 0012 E38 LD  
0199 0013 FDF RET  
0200 0128 FDO POP A  
MY,08 F 0 020 021 0011 W021=8  
F 0 020 021 0011 R01C=8 R01D=2 R01E=1  
F 0 020 021 0011 R01F=0  
#HG  
LDC  
2418 0166 B3A LD  
2419 0167 CAE AND MX,0E 7 6 03A 03A 0010 R03A=1 W03A=0  
PC IR OP  
OPR. A B  
Y,3A 7 6 03A 03A 0000  
X
Y IDZC MEMORY OPERATION  
OTHER  
2420 0168 BFE LD  
2421 0169 E20 LD  
2422 016A BF0 LD  
X,2E 7 6 02E 03A 0010  
MX,00 7 6 02E 03A 0010 W02E=0  
X,20 7 6 020 03A 0010  
2423 016B 980 LBPX MX,B0 7 6 021 03A 0010 W020=0 W021=8  
2424 016C 9C1 LBPX MX,C1 7 6 023 03A 0010 W022=1 W023=C  
... Instruction terminated by "ESC" key input  
#
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-31  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
HS, HSR, HSW  
HISTORY SEARCH PC/MEMORY READ/MEMORY WRITE  
Format  
#HS,<address>  
#HSR,<address>  
#HSW,<address>  
Function  
Retrieves and indicates history information under the following conditions.  
(1) HS:  
Indicates the history information of the PC address specified by <address>.  
(2) HSR: Indicates the history information which read the memory specified by <address>.  
(3) HSW: Indicates the history information which wrote the memory specified by <address>.  
#HS,0700  
LOC  
1980 0700 FC1 PUSH B  
... Retrieves and indicates the history information of PC = 700  
PC IR OP OPR. A B X Y IDZC MEMORY OPERATION OTHER  
Examples  
0 0 0FE 0FF 1111 W0F0=0  
5 1 0FE 0F0 1001 W0FE=1  
2038 0700 FC1 PUSH B  
:
:
#HSR,30  
LOC  
... Retrieves and indicates the history information which read address 30  
PC IR OP OPR. A B X Y IDZC MEMORY OPERATION OTHER  
0820 0640 EC2 LD A,MX 0 0 030 0FF 1111 R030=0  
0950 084F EC6 LD B,MY 0 F 030 0FF 1111 R030=F  
:
:
#HSW,30  
LOC  
... Retrieves and indicates the history information which wrote address 30  
PC IR OP OPR. A B X Y IDZC MEMORY OPERATION OTHER  
0838 0650 E60 LDPX MX,0 0 0 030 0FF 1111 W030=0  
0950 084F E71 LDPY MY,1 0 0 0FF 030 1111 W030=1  
:
:
#
VIII-32  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
HISTORY POINTER DISPLAY/SET  
HP, HPS  
Format  
#HP  
#HPS,<history pointer>  
Function  
(1) HP: Displays current history pointer value.  
(2) HPS: Sets the displayed history pointer value in the current history pointer. When a  
value is input which exceeds the last history pointer, the last pointer value is set to  
the current history pointer.  
(3) The history pointer is displayed in four lines of decimal code, and set.  
#HP  
* LOC=2058  
Examples  
... Pointer (last value) displayed at break  
#HPS,1000  
... Pointer set to 1000  
#HP  
* LOC=1000  
... Pointer value = 1000  
#HPS,9999  
* LOC=2058  
... Return to last pointer value  
Last pointer value is validated when last value is exceeded  
#HP  
* LOC=2058  
#
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-33  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
CHK  
CHECK ICE HARDWARE  
Format  
#CHK  
Function  
Displays the results of the ICE initial test. (ICE executes the initial test at power on.)  
The test consists of the following:  
(1) Sum check test of ICE firmware  
(2) ICE RAM R/ W test  
#CHK  
Examples  
* ROM CHECK ERROR 5F=>FF *  
Message is displayed when an  
error is detected  
* RAM CHECK ERROR 001111 55=>FF *  
#CHK  
#
... A waits command under normal conditions  
Note  
When an error message is displayed, avoid further use of the device since it is likely due to  
hardware failure.  
VIII-34  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
DISPLAY X, Y REGISTER & MX, MY CONTENT  
DXY  
Format  
#DXY  
Function  
Displays current X register (Xp, Xh, Xl) and Y register (Yp, Yh, Yl), as well as MX and MY  
(contents of memory specified by codes X and Y).  
#DXY  
Examples  
X=070 MX= 5  
Y=07C MY= F  
#DXY  
X=200 MX=-:OV  
Y=050 MY=-  
... Indicates the RAM area has been exceeded;  
read operation not viable  
:.......... Indicates write only area; read operation not viable  
#DXY  
X=E73 MX= /  
Y=252 MY= F  
... Shows that E73 is unused area  
... Read operation not viable  
#
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-35  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
CVD, CVR DISPLAY/RESET COVERAGE  
Format  
#CVD,<address 1>,<address 2>  
#CVD  
#CVR  
Function  
Indicates and clears coverage information.  
(1) CVD: Indicates the coverage information ranging from <address 1> to <address 2>.  
Indicates all coverage information when address are omitted.  
(2) CVR: Clears coverage information.  
#CVD,100,110  
*CV 0100  
*CV 0109..0110  
#
... Indicates the coverage information ranging  
Examples  
from address 100 to 110  
#CVD  
... Indicates the whole coverage information  
*CV 0100  
*CV 0109..02FF  
*CV 0400..04FF  
#
#CVR  
#
... Clear coverage information  
VIII-36  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
3.2 Set Command Group  
A
ASSEMBLE PROGRAM................................................. VIII-38  
FP  
FILL PROGRAM............................................................ VIII-40  
FILL DATA RAM .......................................................... VIII-41  
MOVE PROGRAM ......................................................... VIII-42  
MOVE DATA RAM ....................................................... VIII-43  
SET PROGRAM ............................................................. VIII-44  
SET DATA RAM ............................................................ VIII-45  
SET REGISTER .............................................................. VIII-46  
SET MX, MY DATA ...................................................... VIII-47  
SET HISTORY CONDITION......................................... VIII-48  
SET HISTORY RANGE ................................................. VIII-49  
DISPLAY HISTORY RANGE ........................................ VIII-49  
RESET HISTORY RANGE ............................................ VIII-49  
FD  
MP  
MD  
SP  
SD  
SR  
SXY  
HC  
HA  
HAD  
HAR  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-37  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
A
ASSEMBLE PROGRAM  
Format  
#A,<address>  
(With guidance)  
Function  
The mnemonic command is assembled and stored at the address indicated by <address>.  
(1) Supports the mnemonics and operands in the instruction list used in the S1C62 Family.  
(2) Operand expressions follow the configurations below:  
p:  
s:  
l:  
i:  
r,q:  
00 to 03 values  
00 to FF values  
00 to FF values  
00 to 0F values  
A, B, MX or MY  
In general, hexadecimal expressions do not have "H" appended at the end.  
Three digit data can be input starting from the 0 column.  
0FF input:  
Validates FF  
00FF input: Causes an error  
An error is generated by invalidated values entered for p, s, l or i.  
Only binary expressions (xxxxB) are allowed in the input area. The x in this case has a  
fixed length of from one to four digits comprised either of 0 or 1, with "B" input last.  
When less than three digits are input, the expression is handled as a binary expression or  
an error.  
(3) Either upper or lower case letters may be used for input.  
(4) Mnemonic and operand codes should be separated by one or more character spaces or by  
a tab code.  
(5) An error is generated when an unsupported instruction is entered.  
(6) A or B input gains register priority. Input 0A or 0B when entering immediate value  
settings.  
LD A,B  
LD B,0A  
Contents of B register are input to A register.  
Immediate value A is loaded to B register.  
VIII-38  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
ASSEMBLE PROGRAM  
A
Format  
#A,<address>  
(With guidance)  
#A,100  
0100 LD A,0F  
... Instruction entered by key input  
Examples  
... Address displayed; mnemonic input awaited (mnemonic  
instruction, operand input)  
0101 /  
...  
/
input cancels instruction  
#A,200  
0200 PUSH XP  
* ERROR *  
... Error generated by unapproved mnemonic input  
(for S1C62XXX); same address is redisplayed  
with mnemonic request  
0200 NOP5  
0201 JJJ 0FF  
* ERROR *  
0201 LD A,FF  
* ERROR *  
0201 LD A,0F  
0202 /  
... Error generated when valid operand range is exceeded  
#A,202  
0202 ^  
0201 /  
... Return to previous address (current address less one) via  
^ key input  
#
Note  
"ESC" key nonfunctional; cancel operation by entering /  
.
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-39  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
FP  
FILL PROGRAM  
Format  
#FP,<address 1>,<address 2>,<program data>  
Function  
Data <program data> is stacked in the program area (ICE emulation memory) at <address 1> to  
<address 2>.  
Program area (for S1C6S3N7/6S3B7/6S3L7)  
000  
Address 1 . . . 100  
Program data  
Reloads with specified data  
Address 2 . . . 2FF  
3FF  
#FP,0,3FF,FFB  
... Data from addresses 000 to 3FF of the program area  
Examples  
are stacked to the FFB (NOP5 code)  
#FP,100,200,FF9  
* COMMAND ERROR *  
... When undefined code is detected, an error message is  
displayed and the instruction will not execute  
#FP,200,100,FFF  
* COMMAND ERROR *  
... Address 1 > address 2 error  
#FP,200,200,FFF  
#
... Address 200 is modified to instruction code FFF (NOP7);  
instruction completes normally  
VIII-40  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
FILL DATA RAM  
FD  
Format  
#FD,<address 1>,<address 2>,<data>  
Function  
<data> is stacked in the data RAM area at <address 1> to <address 2> in hexadecimal or binary  
code.  
Data RAM area (for S1C6S3N7/6S3B7/6S3L7)  
00  
Address 1 . . . 06  
Data  
Reloads with specified data  
Address 2 . . . 40  
LCD RAM  
I/ O  
70  
7E  
#FD,60,7E,A  
... Reloads the contents of the data RAM addresses 60 to 7E to A  
Examples  
#FD,10,2F,0101B  
... Reloads address 10 to 2F with data 0101 (binary) = 5 (hexadecimal)  
#FD,50,1FF,0  
* COMMAND ERROR *  
... Error is generated because settings exceed the RAM area  
(address 7E for S1CS1C6S3N7/6S3B7/6S3L7) and the  
instruction will not execute  
#FD,70,60,0  
* COMMAND ERROR * ... Address 1 > address 2 error  
#FD,0,7E,B  
... Reloads the entire RAM area (for S1C6S3N7/6S3B7/6S3L7)  
with data B (hexadecimal)  
#FD,40,40,0  
#
... 0 written to 40 address  
Notes  
(1) For binary expressions, four digit 0 (or 1) and B input (total of five characters) only are  
accepted.  
(2) Write operation is not performed to the read only address of the I/ O area.  
(3) When there is an unused area in the specified address, the data is rewritten except for the  
unused area.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-41  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
MP  
MOVE PROGRAM  
Format  
#MP,<address 1>,<address 2>,<address 3>  
Function  
Contents of program area <address 1> to <address 2> are transferred to <address 3> and above.  
Program area (for S1C6S3N7/6S3B7/6S3L7)  
Address 1 . . . 000  
A
Address 2 . . . 0FF  
Address 3 . . . 100  
A
1FF  
3FF  
#MP,0,FF,100  
... Contents of program area addresses 000 to 0FF are  
transferred to addresses 100 to 1FF  
Examples  
#MP,100,2FF,300  
* COMMAND ERROR *  
... When the transfer area surpasses address 3FF, an error  
message is displayed and the instruction will not execute  
#MP,200,100,300  
* COMMAND ERROR *  
... Address 1 > address 2 error  
#MP,200,200,300  
#
... Contents of address 200 are copied to address 300, then  
the instruction is executed normally  
VIII-42  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
MOVE DATA RAM  
MD  
Format  
#MD,<address 1>,<address 2>,<address 3>  
Function  
Contents of <address 1> to <address 2> in the data RAM area are transferred to <address 3>  
and above.  
Data RAM area (for S1C6S3N7/6S3B7/6S3L7)  
Address 1 . . . 00  
A
Address 2 . . . 3F  
Address 3 . . . 50  
A
4F  
7E  
#MD,10,1F,30  
#MD,00,3F,70  
... Contents of data RAM addresses 10 to 1F are moved to  
Examples  
addresses 30 to 3F  
* COMMAND ERROR *  
... When the transfer area exceeds the RAM area (7E for  
S1C6S3N7/6S3B7/6S3L7), an error is indicated and  
commands are not executed  
#MD,30,20,50  
* COMMAND ERROR *  
... Address 1 > address 2 error  
#MD,30,30,50  
... Contents of address 30 are copied to address 50, then  
instruction is executed normally  
#MD,E00,E1F,E60  
* UNUSED AREA *  
... When there is an unused area in the transfer area (either  
sending or receiving side), an unused area error  
message is displayed (for S1C6S460)  
#
Notes  
(1) A write operation cannot execute when the top transferred address coincides with the  
I/ O area read only region.  
(2) A read operation cannot execute when the bottom transferred address coincides with the  
I/ O area write only region. In this case a 0 is written to the top address.  
(3) When the transfer address coincides with an I/ O address of mixed readable bits and  
write only bits, either read or write operations can execute.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-43  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
SP  
SET PROGRAM  
Format  
#SP,<address>  
(With guidance)  
Function  
Contents of the specified program area <address> are displayed or modified.  
#SP,100  
0100 FFF:  
Examples  
... Contents of address 100 are read, and cannot be modified  
by a alone  
0101 FFF:FFB  
0102 FFF:FF9  
* CODE ERROR *  
... New data is written  
... Error message is displayed when undefined code is  
detected; contents are written unchanged to the same  
address  
0102 FFF:F05  
0103 FFF:A6B  
0104 FFF:^  
... Operation returns to previous address (one less than  
0103 A6B:^  
current address) via input by entering ^  
0102 F05:F06  
0103 A6B:  
0104 FFF:ABx  
* COMMAND ERROR *  
0104 FFF:ABC  
0105 FFF:/  
... Error is generated by data setting error; message displayed  
...  
/
input terminates instruction  
#SP,400  
* COMMAND ERROR *  
... Since it exceeds the program area (3FF for S1C6S3N7/  
6S3B7/6S3L7), an error is indicated  
#SP,3FE  
3FE FFF:011  
3FF FFF:FFB  
... Instruction is completed after last address in input  
#
VIII-44  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
SET DATA RAM  
SD  
Format  
#SD,<address>  
(With guidance)  
Function  
Contents of the data RAM area <address> are displayed or modified.  
(1) Data cannot be written to the read only area.  
(2) Data in the write only area cannot be read.  
#SD,20  
Examples  
20 5:A  
21 5:^  
20 A:B  
21 5:F  
22 5:/  
... Contents of address 20 are modified and stored to A  
... Return to previous address (one less than the current  
address) by entering ^  
... Instruction terminated by /  
#SD,FFF  
* COMMAND ERROR *  
... When specification exceeds the maximum value of the  
RAM area (7F for S1C6S3N7/66S3B7/6S3L7), an  
error is indicated  
#SD,70  
70 4:-  
71 F:-  
72 5:-  
73 6:-  
74 6:5  
75 8:4  
76 5:A  
77 8:9  
78 8:5  
79 A:-  
7A B:-  
: : :  
7E F:-  
... Hyphen only displayed due to read only address;  
data input not accepted  
... Command terminates after last address entered  
#SD,E50  
* UNUSED AREA *  
... When an unused area has been specified, "UNUSED  
AREA" is displayed (for S1C6S460)  
#SD,ECE  
ECE 0:F  
ECF 4:F  
* UNUSED AREA *  
... When an unused area is entered into during data setting,  
"UNUSED AREA" is displayed (for S1C6S460)  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-45  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
SR  
SET REGISTER  
Format  
#SR  
(With guidance)  
#SR,<register name>,<data>  
#
Function  
Evaluation board CPU registers are displayed and modified.  
(1) <data> is set in specified registers.  
Examples  
(2) <register name> can be specified as: PC, A, B, X, Y, FI, FD, FZ, FC, and SP.  
#SR  
PC=0100:0105  
A= 5:  
... Input data and  
to registers you wish to modify enter  
only to skip to the next register  
B= A:5  
X= 02F:20  
Y= 010:1A  
FI= 0:1  
FD= 1:  
FZ= 0:  
FC= 1:0  
SP= 4F:^  
FC= 0:1  
SP= 4F:  
... Entering the ^ returns operation to previous register  
(one less than the current register)  
#SR,X,AA  
... X register only is changed to AA  
#SR  
PC= 105:  
A= 5:  
B= 5:  
X= 2A:  
Y= 2A:  
:
... Current value is saved with key input  
SP= 4F:  
#
Note  
VIII-46  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
SET MX, MY DATA  
SXY  
Format  
#SXY  
(With guidance)  
Function  
Instruction will not complete with /  
input; use  
up to the last register.  
Current contents of the X register (Xp, Xh, Xl), Y register (Yp, Yh, Yl), and MX and MY  
Examples  
(contents specify memory X, Y) are displayed. Contents of MX and MY can also be modified.  
#SXY  
X=040 MX=5:  
Y=030 MY=A:  
... Display only; alone continues operation  
#SXY  
X=040 MX=5:0  
Y=030 MY=A:F  
... Sets new data to MX, MY  
#SXY  
X=070 MX=3:-  
Y=FFF MY=-:OV  
... Data to read only area not accepted  
... Input not accepted if RAM area is exceeded  
#SXY  
X=E52 MX * UNUSED AREA * ... An unused area error message is displayed  
Y=1A7 MY=1:3 for E52 (for S1C6S460)  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-47  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
HC  
SET HISTORY CONDITION  
Format  
#HC,S/C/E  
#
Function  
Sets up the area for history extraction by means of the break point.  
Examples  
"[ ]" is added to the break point.  
#HC,S  
#HC,C  
#HC,E  
... Extracts the history from the break point  
... Extracts the history before and after the break point  
... Extracts the history up to the break point (default value)  
VIII-48  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
SET/DISPLAY/RESET HISTOY RANGE  
HA, HAD, HAR  
Format  
#HA,<address 1>,<address 2>/ALL  
#HAD  
#HAR,<address 1>,<address 2>/ALL  
#
Function  
Sets up, indicates and clears PC address within the history extraction area.  
(1) HA: Extract the range specified by <address 1> and <address 2>.  
When specifying ALL, all addresses will be specified.  
(2) HAD: Indicates the address of history extraction area.  
(3) HAR: Do not extract the range specified by <address 1> and <address 2>.  
Examples  
When specifying ALL, history isn't extracted.  
#HAR,ALL  
... Clears the entire history extraction area  
#HA,300,400  
#HA,100,200  
#HA,500,500  
... Specifies history extraction area  
#HAD  
... Indicates history extraction area  
*HA 0100..0200  
*HA 0300..0400  
*HA 0500  
#
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-49  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
VIII-50  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
3.3 Break and Go Command Group  
BA  
SET BREAK ADDRESS CONDITION....................... VIII-52  
BAR  
BD  
BDR  
BR  
RESET BREAK ADDRESS CONDITION .................. VIII-52  
SET BREAK DATA CONDITION .............................. VIII-53  
RESET BREAK DATA CONDITION ......................... VIII-53  
SET BREAK REGISTER CONDITION...................... VIII-54  
RESET BREAK REGISTER CONDITION................. VIII-54  
SET BREAK MULTIPLE CONDITION..................... VIII-56  
RESET BREAK MULTIPLE CONDITION ................ VIII-56  
BREAK CONDITION DISPLAY ................................. VIII-58  
RESET ALL BREAK CONDITION ............................ VIII-59  
GO TARGET PROGRAM ........................................... VIII-60  
SINGLE STEP TRACE................................................ VIII-63  
SINGLE STEP TRACE  
BRR  
BM  
BMR  
BC  
BRES  
G
T
U
& LAST INFORMATION DISPLAY .......................... VIII-65  
BREAK ENABLE MODE SET ................................... VIII-66  
BREAK DISABLE & SYNC MODE SET ................. VIII-66  
BREAK TRACE MODE SET...................................... VIII-67  
BE  
BSYN  
BT  
BRKSEL BREAK ADDRESS MODE SELECT ......................... VIII-68  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-51  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
BA, BAR  
SET/RESET BREAK ADDRESS CONDITION  
Format  
#BA,<address 1>,<address 2>,<address 3>,<address 4>  
#BAR,<address 1>,<address 2>,<address 3>,<address 4>  
Function  
Sets break condition for the PC.  
(1) BA: The value indicated at the specified <address> is set to the break condition.  
Multiple addresses are set by using commas to divide them. Consecutive ad-  
dresses are set by separating entries with two period marks (.). Entering <address  
3>..<address 4> sets a break condition such that <address 3> PC <address 4>.  
(2) BAR: Can be cleared separately from break condition set by BA.  
(3) Addresses which can be entered by a single BA or BAR instruction can be set multiple  
times in a single line (80 columns).  
(4) When the BA command is executed several times, previous settings are valid.  
(5) When the BM command is executed, all BA conditions are canceled.  
(6) When entering the GO command at a break, the BA condition may enter the clear mode  
or a condition retaining mode. (Refer to the BRKSEL command.)  
#BA,100,200,101,1FF  
#BA,300..3FF  
... Break condition set at addresses 100, 200, 101 and 1FF  
Examples  
... Break conditions set at addresses 300 to 3FF  
#BAR,100,200..3FF  
... Break conditions canceled at address 100 and addresses  
200 to 3FF (although break conditions were not set at  
addresses 201 to 2FF, no error occurs even with BAR  
setting)  
#BC  
BA 0201  
BA 02FF  
BD NONE  
BR NONE  
:
... BA condition is displayed by BC command  
#
VIII-52  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
SET/RESET BREAK DATA CONDITION BD, BDR  
Format  
#BD  
(With guidance)  
#BDR  
Function  
Break condition set for data RAM read/ write area.  
(1) BD: Break condition set for RAM data address, data, and R/ W. Address can be set at  
one point, data set from addresses 0 to F or masked, and the R/ W area set to read,  
write, or masked. A break is generated when the three conditions specified by  
address, data, and R/ W coincide.  
(2) BDR: Cancels the condition set by BD command.  
(3) A break condition set by the BD command is functional at one point only, but can be  
mixed with BA and BR commands.  
(4) A BD condition can be canceled by executing the BM command.  
#BD  
Examples  
ADDR ---:074  
DATA -:5  
... A hyphen (-) is displayed when the BD condition is absent  
At address 74, the number 5 is entered as data and the R/W  
is masked (*)  
R/W  
-:*  
In the above example, a break is set for when the number 5 is written to or read from the data RAM  
address 074.  
#BD  
ADDR 074:  
... When no setting modification is made, hitting the key  
continues the operation to the next setting  
... Data is masked  
DATA 5 :1*1*B  
R/W * :W  
... Sets the R/W function to write  
At the current settings, a break is generated when 1 is written to 23 bit and 21 bit at data RAM address 74.  
#BDR  
#BD  
... All BD conditions are cleared  
ADDR ---:  
... Entering  
after canceling BD setting confirms cancellation  
#
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-53  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
BR, BRR  
SET/RESET BREAK REGISTER CONDITION  
Format  
#BR  
(With guidance)  
#BRR  
Function  
A break condition is set in the evaluation board CPU registers A, B, FLAG, X (Xp, Xh, Xl,) or  
Y (Yp, Yh, Yl).  
(1) BR:  
A break condition is set in the target registers A, B, FLAG, X (Xp, Xh, Xl,) or Y  
(Yp, Yh, Yl). The break condition in each register can be masked (a masked  
register can generate a break in another register, whatever the specified value).  
Break is induced when the values of each register correspond to the set values in  
the internal CPU registers.  
(2) BRR: Cancels a break condition set by BR command.  
(3) A break set by the BR command is operative at one point. BA and BD settings can be  
mixed.  
(4) A BR condition can be canceled by executing the BM command.  
#BR  
Examples  
A
-:C  
-:*  
... A hyphen (-) is displayed when a BR condition is not set  
B
Break condition is sequentially set  
FI  
FD  
FZ  
FC  
X
-:1  
-:*  
... Enter an asterisk (*) mark to indicate masking  
-:0  
This induces a break unrelated to the FD value  
-:*  
---:040  
---:^  
---:041  
---:030  
Y
... If a parameter is mis-set, entering the ^ key will return  
the operation to the previous setting (one less than the  
current setting)  
X
Y
A break condition set as described above, where A=C, FI=1, FZ=0, X=41, and Y=30.  
#BR  
A
C:  
*:  
... Reads a previously set break condition  
When no setting modification is made, hitting the key  
continues the operation to the next setting  
B
FI  
FD  
FZ  
FC  
X
1:*  
*:  
0:*  
*:  
041:042  
030:*  
Y
Two break conditions where A=C and X=42 are described above.  
VIII-54  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
SET/RESET BREAK REGISTER CONDITION BR, BRR  
Format  
#BR  
(With guidance)  
#BRR  
#BRR  
... A BR condition is cleared by the BRR command  
Examples  
#BR  
A
-:  
... Entering  
after canceling BR setting confirms cancellation  
#BR  
A
-:0  
-:0  
B
FI  
FD  
FZ  
FC  
X
-:*  
-:*  
-:*  
-:*  
---:40  
---:30  
Y
A break condition is set wherein A=0, B=0, X=40, and Y=30.  
#BR  
A
0:  
0:5  
*:/  
B
FI  
... Entering / when no further setting changes are desired  
completes the instruction  
A break condition is set where A=0, B=5, X=40, and Y=30.  
#
Notes  
(1) The target system operates in real time even when a GO command is executed after  
setting a BR condition.  
(2) Each model has a different RAM area, and XY settings in a BR command can be set to  
FFF.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-55  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
BM, BMR  
SET/RESET BREAK MULTIPLE CONDITION  
Format  
#BM  
(With guidance)  
#BMR  
Function  
Sets the compound break function for multiple breaks when all conditions for the evaluation  
board CPU PC, data RAM access, and register values coincide.  
(1) Although the BA, BD and BR conditions can be set independently, the BM command  
generates a break when all conditions for the PC, data RAM access, and register values  
coincide. In other words, it can be thought of as the AND setting for the BA, BD and BR  
commands.  
(2) Previously set BA, BD and BR conditions are canceled by the BM command. Also, the BM  
setting is canceled when the BA, BD and/ or BR conditions are set after the BM condition  
is set.  
(3) The BMR command cancels the BM condition.  
(4) A break is set at only one point by the BM command. Each register setting can be masked.  
#BM  
Examples  
PC ----:100  
ADDR ---:70  
... A hyphen (-) is displayed when a BM condition is canceled.  
Break condition is set where PC=100, RAM access=70,  
RAM data=A, D and C flags=1, and Y register=3E.  
During execution of the instructions at address 100, a break  
occurs when the following conditions coincide:  
RAM at address 70 is accessed, read/write data A, FD and FC  
are set, and Y register is 3E. (Valid for break during program  
loop.)  
DATA  
R/W  
A
-:A  
-:*  
-:*  
B
-:*  
FI  
FD  
FZ  
FC  
X
-:*  
-:1  
-:*  
-:1  
---:*  
---:3E  
... The point at which the break is placed is masked by an  
Y
asterisk (*) mark.  
VIII-56  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
SET/RESET BREAK MULTIPLE CONDITION BM, BMR  
Format  
#BM  
(With guidance)  
#BMR  
#BM  
PC  
Examples  
100:*  
... PC mask  
ADDR 70:71  
DATA A:^  
... Enables return to previous operation when ^ key is entered  
ADDR 71:72  
DATA  
R/W  
A
A:  
... Previous setting retained when alone is entered  
*:W  
*:  
B
*:  
FI  
FD  
FZ  
FC  
X
*:  
1:  
*:  
1:  
*:70  
Y
7E:  
As shown above, a break is generated when data A is written to RAM address 72 if CPU register  
X=70, Y=7E, FD=1 and FC=1.  
#BM  
PC  
*:100  
ADDR 71:/  
#BMR  
#BM  
... Entering / does not alter later settings; adds PC=100 to  
above conditions  
... Cancels condition set by BM command  
PC ----:  
... Entering after canceling BM setting confirms cancellation  
#
Notes  
(1) Use of the BM command automatically cancels BA, BD and BR commands.  
(2) This instruction runs a break comparison only during execution with memory access. The  
above described limitations remain even when ADDR, data and R/ W are masked.  
Therefore, a break will not occur when the instruction does not access data memory even  
if the PC and register values coincide.  
(3) Each model has a different RAM area, and XY settings in a BM command can be set to  
FFF.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-57  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
BC  
BREAK CONDITION DISPLAY  
Format  
#BC  
Function  
Examples  
Displays the current break condition.  
#BC  
... Break condition is verified after power on. All break  
* BA NONE  
conditions are canceled.  
* BD NONE  
* BR NONE  
* BM NONE  
* BREAK ENABLE MODE  
* BREAK STOP MODE  
* TIME COUNT MODE  
... Enters break enable mode  
... Enters break stop mode  
... Enters real-time mode  
#BA,100,101  
#BC  
... Reads after address break condition set Break condition  
* BA 0100..0101  
* BD NONE  
confirmed  
* BR NONE  
* BM NONE  
* BREAK ENABLE MODE  
* BREAK STOP MODE  
* TIME COUNT MODE  
#BRES  
#BA,100,102  
#BC  
* BA 0100  
* BA 0102  
:
... Displays multiple executions of BA condition when  
addresses are not consecutive  
#
VIII-58  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
RESET ALL BREAK CONDITION  
BRES  
Format  
#BRES  
Function  
All break conditions (BA, BD, BR, or BM settings) are canceled.  
#BRES  
Examples  
#BC  
* BA NONE  
* BD NONE  
* BR NONE  
* BM NONE  
* BREAK ENABLE MODE  
* BREAK STOP MODE  
* TIME COUNT MODE  
#
Note  
Although the break condition is canceled, the break mode (enable/ disable, trace, stop,  
time/ stop) is still operative.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-59  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
G
GO TARGET PROGRAM  
Format  
#G  
#G,<address >  
#G,R  
Function  
This instruction runs the target program. When a break condition is detected, program  
execution is halted and the break status is displayed to complete the instruction.  
Setting the Starting Address  
(1) When an <address> is entered, the run starts from that address.  
(2) With an R setting the evaluation board CPU is reset, and the run starts from the reset  
address 0100.  
(3) When the <address> and R setting are defaulted, the run starts from the current  
address (PC which displays the status during the previous break).  
When G is entered after power on, the run starts from address 0100, but the  
evaluation board CPU is not reset.  
Break Mode and Break Condition  
Item Break mode (note)  
Break condition  
Break enable mode * Reset switch  
& break stop mode * Break switch  
Comments  
Mode at power on.  
1
* Break set commands  
(BA, BD, BR, BM)  
* ESC input  
Break enable mode * Reset switch  
& break trace mode * Break switch  
* ESC input  
When the break condition and evaluation  
board CPU executed cycle coincide,  
the bleak status alone is displayed and  
the GO command is restarted.  
When the break condition and evaluation  
board CPU executed cycle coincide,  
a pulse is output to the SYNC pin.  
2
3
BSYN mode  
* Reset switch  
& break stop mode * Break switch  
* ESC input  
Note: Refer to Section 2.3.2, "Break mode and break function" for more information on the  
break mode.  
VIII-60  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
GO TARGET PROGRAM  
G
Format  
#G  
#G,<address >  
#G,R  
Function  
Display During Execution of GO Instruction  
Item Display mode (note)  
Display method  
On-the-fly display mode #G  
1
*PC=xxxx...Sampling of the PC is displayed  
about every 500 msec.  
HALT message is displayed during halt.  
Exection status is not displayed.  
On-the-fly inhibit mode  
#G  
2
Note: Refer to Section 2.3.4, "Display during run mode and during break" for information on  
the display modes.  
Break Display  
#G  
*PC=xxxx  
*EMULATION END STATUS = BREAK HIT  
... (A)  
*PC=0100 A=0 B=0 X=70 Y=00 F=ID.C SP=10 ... (B)  
*RUN TIME=xxx mS  
... (C)  
The break status is displayed.  
(A)BREAK HIT, ESC KEY, BREAK SW displays appear in parts. When the reset switch is  
depressed, the message, *ICE6200 RESET SW TARGET*, is displayed without  
displaying the break status, and the next instruction is awaited.  
(B) Register contents are displayed in part when PC (next executed address) is stopped.  
(C) The execution time or executed number of steps set by TIM command are displayed  
in part. (Refer to the TIM command.)  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-61  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
G
GO TARGET PROGRAM  
Format  
#G  
#G,<address >  
#G,R  
#OTF  
... On-the-fly set command  
Examples  
* ON THE FLY ON *  
These settings  
are set at power  
on; default is  
#BE  
... Break enable set command  
* BREAK ENABLE MODE *  
command input  
#BT  
... Break stop mode set command  
* BREAK STOP MODE *  
#G,R  
... Target and evaluation board is reset; run starts from  
reset address (0100)  
*PC=xxxx  
... PC display is cyclic  
*EMULATION END STATUS = BREAK HIT  
... (A)  
*PC=01FF A=5 B=0 X=70 Y=05 F=..ZC SP=20 ... (B)  
*RUN TIME=100mS ... (C)  
(A) Break displayed through break condition (BA condition set at 01FE)  
(B) F is expresses reset bit and (.) bit as English letter  
(C) Run time is 100mS  
#
VIII-62  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
SINGLE STEP TRACE  
T
Format  
#T,<address >,<step number>  
#T,<address >  
#T,,<step number>  
#T  
Function  
Executes trace, and single step actions of programs.  
(1) The specified portion of the target program executes with a frequency indicated by the  
<step number> from the specified <address> (65535 possible in decimal code). The PC,  
instruction word and register contents are displayed with each execution.  
(2) When the <step number> is defaulted, only one step is executed.  
(3) When the <address> is defaulted, the specified number of steps is executed from the  
current PC (PC at which the previous T command completed).  
(4) When both <address> and <step number> are defaulted, only one step is executed from the  
current PC. When this setting occurs after power on, one step is executed from PC=0100.  
(5) When the <step number> is one (#T, <address> or #T), the instruction does not terminate  
after one step, but a further step is executed by the "SP" key input, at which time the  
instruction can be terminated by the "ESC" key input.  
(6) In (1) above, the instruction is terminated by "ESC" key input.  
#T,100,3  
Examples  
*PC=0100 IR=FFF NOP7  
A=0 B=0 X=00F Y=00F F=IDZC SP=10  
*PC=0101 IR=E05 LD A,5 A=5 B=0 X=00F Y=00F F=IDZC SP=10  
*PC=0102 IR=B05 ADC XH,5 A=5 B=0 X=051 Y=00F F=IDZC SP=10  
|
|
|
Executed PC  
is displayed  
Command code  
and mnemonic  
are displayed  
Correctors displayed when the flag is set  
and/or reset (After executing three steps,  
the current PC is 0103)  
#
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-63  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
T
SINGLE STEP TRACE  
Format  
#T,<address >,<step number>  
#T,<address >  
#T,,<step number>  
#T  
#T  
Program executes sequentially in steps from current PC (=103) via "SP" key.  
*PC=0103 IR=FDF RET A=5 B=0 X=04F Y=03F F=IDZC SP=013 ... "SP"  
Examples  
*PC=01AA IR=AD1 OR A,B A=5 B=0 X=04F Y=03F F=ID.C SP=013 ... "ESC"  
Instruction is terminated by "ESC" key.  
#T  
*PC=01AB IR=xxx PSET 2 A=x B=x X=xxx Y=xxx F=xxxx SP=013  
*PC=01AC IR=xxx JP 10 A=x B=x X=xxx Y=xxx F=xxxx SP=013 ... "ESC"  
#
Because the PSET command is used in relation to the subsequent instruction,  
two command executions can be set by invoking the T command once.  
#T  
*PC=01AD IR=xxx HALT _  
Cursor  
#
When the HALT command is executed by the T command, the command mnemonics are displayed  
until the target interrupt as described above, but the register value is not displayed. When an interrupt  
is properly input, the register is displayed and the next "SP" is awaited. The "SP" input restarts the  
program after the interrupt routine.  
When the target interrupt never occurs, the instruction can be forced to terminate by using the "ESC"  
key. At that point, the HALT and T commands terminate, but the HALT command executes from the  
next address when the T command is operative.  
Notes  
(1) The T command does not operate in real time. Therefore, the target timer is renewed. (For  
details refer to Section 2.3.13, "Limitations during emulation".)  
(2) When the H command is input after executing this command, the message, *NO HIS-  
TORY DATA*, is displayed. Therefore, the G command must be used to analyze history  
data.  
VIII-64  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
SINGLE STEP TRACE & LAST INFORMATION DISPLAY  
U
Format  
#U,<address >,<step number>  
#U,,<step number>  
Function  
Executes trace and single step actions of programs and indicates final results alone.  
(1) The target program is executed from the address specified in <address> for the frequency  
specified in <step number> (65535 possible in decimal code), but the results are not  
displayed until after the final instruction is completed.  
(2) When the <address> is defaulted, execution starts from the current PC for the specified  
number of steps.  
#U,100,5  
Examples  
*PC=01AA IR=ADI OR A,B A=5 B=0 X=04F T=03F F=ID.C SP=13  
#U,,1  
*PC=01AB IR=FFF NOP7  
A=5 B=0 X=04F Y=03F F=ID.C SP=13  
#
Notes  
(1) The U command does not run in real time, so the target timer is renewed. (For details  
refer to Section 2.3.13, "Limitations during emulation".)  
(2) When the H command is input after executing this command, the message, *NO HIS-  
TORY DATA*, is displayed. Therefore, the G command must be used to analyze history  
data.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-65  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
BE, BSYN  
BREAK ENABLE MODE SET/BREAK DISABLE & SYNC MODE SET  
Format  
#BE  
#BSYN  
Function  
Sets the break enable mode and break disable mode.  
(1) BE:  
Sets the break enable mode. A break is generated when the BA, BD, BR or BM  
conditions coincide with the evaluation board CPU state.  
(2) BSYN: Sets the break disable (synchronous) mode. When the BA, BD, BR or BM condi-  
tions coincide with the evaluation board CPU state, a pulse is output to the ICE  
SYNC pin and a break is not generated.  
(3) At power on, the break enable mode is operative.  
#BE  
Examples  
* BREAK ENABLE MODE  
#BSYN  
* BREAK DISABLE MODE  
* BREAK STOP MODE  
#
Note  
Refer to Section 2.3.2, "Break mode and break function", for details of break enable/ disable  
functions.  
VIII-66  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
BREAK TRACE MODE SET  
BT  
Format  
#BT  
(Toggle)  
Function  
Selects the break stop mode or the break trace mode. Setting is reversed with each command  
input. At power on, the break stop mode is operative.  
#BT  
Examples  
* BREAK TRACE MODE  
* BREAK ENABLE MODE  
... Since the stop mode is operative at power on, the trace  
mode is set by command input  
#BT  
* BREAK STOP MODE  
... The setting is reversed by command input  
#
Note  
Refer to Section 2.3.2, "Break mode and break function", for details of break stop and trace  
modes.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-67  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
BRKSEL  
BREAK ADDRESS MODE SELECT  
Format  
#BRKSEL,REM  
#BRKSEL,CLR  
Function  
Examples  
After setting the break address condition (BA), the program runs until stopped by a break  
hit; the settings then remain or clear the previously set BA condition. The clear mode (CLR  
mode) is operative at power on. The BA condition remain mode (REM mode) is used when  
multiple break conditions are set and the program runs to consecutive break points. The BA  
condition clear mode (CLR mode) is used to debug when the break point is changed with  
each break.  
#BA,0100  
#BRKSEL,REM  
... Remain mode is set  
#BC  
BA 0100  
:
#G  
*PC=100  
*EMULATION END STATUS = BREAK HIT ... Break is generated when break  
*RUN TIME=10mS  
condition hits  
#BA,200  
... New break condition is set  
#BC  
BA 0100  
BA 0200  
:
... Pre-break condition remains  
#BRKSEL,CLR  
... Clear mode is set  
#G  
*PC=101  
*EMULATION END STATUS = BREAK HIT ... Break condition hits  
*RUN TIME=30mS  
#BA,300  
... New break condition is set  
#BC  
BA 0300  
:
... Pre-break condition is canceled  
#BA,350,3A0  
#BC  
BA 0300  
BA 0350  
BA 03A0  
... After break condition remains  
#
VIII-68  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
3.4 File Command Group  
RF  
READ PROGRAM FILE ............................................... VIII-70  
RFD  
VF  
READ DATA FILE ........................................................ VIII-70  
VERIFY PROGRAM FILE ............................................ VIII-71  
VERIFY DATA FILE ..................................................... VIII-71  
WRITE PROGRAM FILE.............................................. VIII-72  
WRITE DATA FILE....................................................... VIII-72  
CONDITION LOAD ....................................................... VIII-73  
CONDITION SAVE ........................................................ VIII-73  
VFD  
WF  
WFD  
CL  
CS  
OPTLD READ HEXA DATA FILE ............................................ VIII-74  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-69  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
RF, RFD  
READ PROGRAM/DATA FILE  
Format  
#RF,<file name>  
#RFD,<file name>  
Function  
Loads files onto the emulation memories.  
(1) RF:  
The hex file specified in <file name> is loaded in the emulation program memory.  
(2) RFD: The hex file (data RAM) specified in <file name> is loaded in the data memory.  
#RF,C6200A0  
#RFD,WORK  
#
... C6200A0H.HEX file and C6200A0L.HEX file are loaded  
in the program memory  
... WORKD. HEX file is loaded in the data memory  
Examples  
Notes  
(1) When the memory area is overreached (address 3FF in program memory; address 7E in  
data memory for S1C6S3N7/ 6S3B7/ 6S3L7) or an FD file format error is detected, an error  
message, *FILE DATA FORMAT ERROR*, is displayed and the instruction  
terminates. The contents of the emulation program memory and data memory are not  
secured.  
(2) I/ O memory, segment memory and unused area are not loaded into data memory.  
(3) The files are in hexadecimal format. (For details, refer to appendix B.)  
(4) The file format is created by the S1C62XXX cross assembler. (For details, refer to the Part  
III, "Cross Assembler ASM62XX".)  
(5) "ESC" key is invalid during instruction execution.  
(6) When an input error (FD error, not drive error) is detected on the PC side, control is  
returned to the operating system, and therefore, the ICS62XX is terminated.  
(7) When an undefined instruction is detected, an error message is displayed and the  
ICS62XX program terminates. (For details, refer to Chapter 4.)  
VIII-70  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
VERIFY PROGRAM/DATA FILE  
VF, VFD  
Format  
#VF,<file name>  
#VFD,<file name>  
Function  
Compares the contents of the emulation memories with those of files.  
(1) VF:  
The contents of the emulation program memory and the hex file specified in  
<file name> are collated.  
(2) VFD: The contents of the emulation data memory (data RAM) and the hex file specified  
in <file name> are collated.  
#VF,C6200A0  
ADDR FD:ICE  
0100 FFF:FFC  
0300 FFC:FFB  
... C6200A0H.HEX and C6200A0L.HEX files and the program  
memory are collated  
Examples  
... The contents of the FD address and the memory are displayed  
only when the collated data do not agree.  
#VFD,DATA  
ADDR FD:ICE  
001 1:3  
* ESC *  
... Display can be interrupted by "ESC" key input  
#
Notes  
(1) Notes (1), (3), (4) and (6) in page VIII-70 are applicable to these instructions.  
(2) "ESC" key is valid during error message display; "ESC" key input terminates the instruc-  
tion.  
(3) I/ O memory, segment memory and unused area in data memory cannot be compared.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-71  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
WF, WFD  
WRITE PROGRAM/DATA FILE  
Format  
#WF,<file name>  
#WFD,<file name>  
Function  
Saves the contents of the emulation memories to files.  
(1) WF: The contents of the emulation program memory are saved to the file specified in  
<file name>.  
(2) WFD: The contents of the emulation data memory (data RAM) are saved to the file  
specified in <file name>.  
#WF,C6200A0  
#WFD,WORK  
... Program memory is saved to C6200A0H.HEX and  
C6200A0L.HEX files.  
... Data memory is saved to WORKD.HEX file.  
Examples  
#WF,ABCDEFGH  
* COMMAND ERROR * ... An error occurs if the file name exceeds seven characters.  
#
Notes  
(1) Notes (3), (4), (5) and (6) of page VIII-70 are applicable to these commands.  
(2) I/ O memory, segment memory and unused area in data memory cannot be saved.  
VIII-72  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
CONDITION LOAD/SAVE  
CL, CS  
Format  
#CL,<file name>  
#CS,<file name>  
Function  
Loads the contents of the emulation memories of ICE and the contents of each setting from  
files or save them to files.  
(1) CL: The program and data from the file specified in <file name> are loaded into the  
program and data memories respectively. Each type of command set condition is  
loaded, also.  
(2) CS: The contents of the current ICE emulation program memory and data memory as  
well as each command set condition (break state, etc.) are saved to the file specified  
in <file name>.  
(3) The loaded and saved contents are as follows:  
• Target program (emulation program)  
• Target data (emulation data)  
• Current register values of the evaluation board CPU (A, B, X, Y, F, SP, PC)  
• Current break data (conditions set by BA, BD, BR and/ or BM commands)  
• Break mode data (execution time/ steps, break stop/ break trace, break enable/ break  
SYNC, with/ without on-the-fly).  
(4) These instructions are valid when power is switched off and reapplied.  
#CS,TEST  
:
... Current ICE set conditions are saved to the TESTC.HEX file;  
contents of emulation program memory are saved to the TESTH.HEX  
file, while contents of data memory are saved to the TESTD.HEX file  
Examples  
Power OFF  
Power ON  
:
#CL,TEST  
... Contents saved in CS are loaded; ICE returns to the status prior to  
power OFF  
#
Notes  
(1) Notes (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), and (6) of page VIII-70 are applicable to these commands.  
(2) A file name of up to seven characters may be specified as <file name> for #CS, <file name>.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-73  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
OPTLD  
READ HEXA DATA FILE  
Format  
#OPTLD,0,<file name>  
Function  
Example  
Load melody HEX files in the evaluation board melody data memory.  
These are HEX files output by the melody assembler and have intel HEX format.  
#OPTLD,0,C2XXYYY ... C2XXYYY.HEX files are loaded in the melody data memory.  
#
VIII-74  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
3.5 ROM Command Group  
RP  
LOAD ROM PROGRAM ............................................... VIII-76  
VERIFY ROM PROGRAM ............................................ VIII-77  
VP  
ROM  
ROM TYPE SELECT ..................................................... VIII-78  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-75  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
RP  
LOAD ROM PROGRAM  
Format  
#RP  
Function  
Examples  
The program is loaded to the ICE emulation memory from the ROM at the ICE ROM socket  
(high and low). The FF ROM data is unassembled.  
#RP  
* NO ROM H/L *  
... Error is generated because high and low ROM are  
unassembled  
#RP  
* NO ROM H *  
... Error generated because high side ROM is unassembled  
#RP  
... Contents of ROM are properly loaded  
#
Notes  
(1) Refer to the ROM command for information on the valid loading region.  
(2) When undefined code is detected, the ICS62XX program is terminated and control  
returns to the operating system.  
VIII-76  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
VERIFY ROM PROGRAM  
VP  
Format  
#VP  
Function  
The contents of the ICE ROM socket (high and low) and the ICE emulation memory are  
compared. When they do not agree, the data contents are displayed.  
#VP  
Examples  
#
When the results of the comparison are acceptable, the program  
execution is at waiting until ordering the next instruction  
:
#VP  
ADDR ROM:ICE  
0100 FFF:FFC  
0300 0FF:0FC  
... All non-agreeing data (ROM address, ROM contents, emulation  
memory contents) are displayed  
:
: :  
03FF 000:001  
#VP  
* NO ROM H *  
#VP  
... Error because high side ROM is unassembled  
ADDR ROM:ICE  
0100 FFF:FFC  
0300 0FF:0FC  
:
: :  
* ESC *  
... Processing is interrupted by "ESC" key input, and the program  
execution is at waiting until entering the next command  
#
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-77  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
ROM  
ROM TYPE SELECT  
Format  
#ROM  
(With guidance)  
Function  
The ROM type which is assembled to the ICE ROM socket is set.  
(1) 2764, 27128, 27256 or 27512 can be selected.  
(2) The region to which the ROM type is loaded is described below.  
LOW  
D0–D7  
HIGH  
D0–D3  
LOW  
D0–D7  
HIGH  
D0–D3  
LOW  
D0–D7  
HIGH  
D0–D3  
LOW  
D0–D7  
HIGH  
D0–D3  
0
0
0
0
Valid  
Valid  
8000  
FFFF  
1FFF  
3FFF  
7FFF  
iR0–iA7–iR11  
iR0–iR11  
iR0–iR11  
iR0–iR11  
2764  
27128  
27256  
27512  
Valid ($8000–$9FFF)  
Instruction code bit  
ROM address  
#ROM  
*ROM 64:  
Examples  
... Initial value set at 64  
When input alone is entered without modification of data,  
the execution is at waiting until entering the next command  
#ROM  
*ROM 64:256  
... Setting changed to 27256  
#ROM  
*ROM 256:FF  
* COMMAND ERROR *  
... Setting other than 64, 128, 256 or 512 results in an error  
#ROM  
*ROM 256:  
#
Note  
ROM which is assembled to the high and low IC sockets should be the same types.  
VIII-78  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
3.6 Control Command Group  
I
INITIALIZE TARGET CPU........................................... VIII-80  
TIME OR STEP MODE SELECTION......................... VIII-81  
TIM  
OTF  
Q
ON THE FLY MODE SET........................................... VIII-82  
QUIT ............................................................................... VIII-83  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-79  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
I
INITIALIZE TARGET CPU  
Format  
#I  
Function  
Resets the evaluation board CPU.  
Resets the evaluation board CPU, but the ICE set conditions (break, etc.) are affected.  
#I  
Example  
#
The execution is at waiting until entering the next command  
VIII-80  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
TIME OR STEP MODE SELECTION  
TIM  
Format  
#TIM  
(Toggle)  
Function  
When the GO command is entered, the execution time counter, execution time count mode  
or step count mode is operative. The execution time count mode is the default at power on.  
The setting is reversed at each command input.  
#TIM  
Examples  
* STEP COUNT MODE ... Since the mode after power supply is the time count mode,  
entering a command toggles the setting to step mode  
#TIM  
* TIME COUNT MODE ... Setting is reversed with each command input  
#
Note  
Refer to Section 2.3.10, "Measurement during command execution", for more details on the  
time count and step count modes.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-81  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
OTF  
ON THE FLY MODE SET  
Format  
#OTF  
(Toggle)  
Function  
Selects whether or not to run the on-the-fly display during GO execution.  
On-the-fly display mode is the default at power on. Use the display off mode when the host  
is connected to a printer.  
#OTF  
Examples  
* ON THE FLY OFF  
... Since the display mode is the default at power on,  
a command input toggles to the display off mode  
#OTF  
* ON THE FLY ON  
... On-the-fly display mode is operative  
#G  
* PC=xxxx  
... Displays fixed cycle of evaluation board CPU’s  
executed PC  
:
#OTF  
* ON THE FLY OFF  
#G  
... PC is not displayed  
#
Note  
For more details about the on-the-fly function, refer to Section 2.3.4, "Display during run  
mode and during break".  
VIII-82  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
QUIT  
Q
Format  
#Q  
Function  
Terminates the ICS62XX program and returns control to the operating system.  
#Q  
Example  
B>  
... A waits control by host computer operating system  
B>ICS62XX  
... Reloads the ICE  
... Epson logo is displayed for about one second ...  
* ICE POWER ON RESET *  
* DIAGNOSTIC TEST OK *  
#
... A waits ICE instruction  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-83  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
VIII-84  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
3.7 HELP Command  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-85  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
HELP  
Format  
#HELP  
(With guidance)  
#HELP,n  
(n=1 to 8)  
Function  
Displays the ICS62XX commands.  
(1) All commands are displayed on a single screen when no option (,n) is set.  
(2) Displays the related commands when an option (,n) is set.  
Explanations for commands of the same group are displayed.  
n value  
Command group  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DISPLAY COMMAND  
SET COMMAND  
BREAK & GO COMMAND  
FILE COMMAND  
ROM COMMAND  
CONTROL COMMAND  
ALL COMMAND DISPLAY  
BASIC COMMAND DISPLAY  
#HELP  
Examples  
Refer to HELP messages on next page  
KEY IN 1.8 ENTER OR ENTER ONLY : 1  
Displays DISPLAY COMMAND  
(Refer to next page)  
#HELP,F  
* COMMAND ERROR *  
... Error is generated if a value other than 1 to 8 is entered  
#
VIII-86  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
HELP  
Format  
#HELP  
(With guidance)  
#HELP,n  
(n=1 to 8)  
#HELP  
Examples  
1.DISPLAY COMMAND  
#L  
#DP #DD #DR #H  
#HB #HG #HS #HSW #HSR  
#HP #CHK #DXY #CVD #HAD  
2.SET COMMAND  
#A  
#HA #HAR #HPS #CVR  
#BA #BD #BR #BM #BAR #BDR #BRR #BMR #BRES  
#BC #G #T #U #BSYN #BE #BT #BRKSEL  
#FP #FD #MP #MD #SP #SD #SR #SXY #HC  
3.BREAK and GO COMMAND  
4.FILE COMMAND  
5.ROM COMMAND  
#RF #VF #WF #RFD #VFD #WFD #CL #CS #OPTLD  
#RP #VP #ROM  
6.CONTROL COMMAND  
7.ALL COMMAND DISPLAY  
8.BASIC COMMAND DISPLAY  
#I  
#TIM #OTF #Q  
KEY IN 1..8 ENTER or ENTER ONLY :  
#
#HELP,1  
1.DISPLAY COMMAND  
(1)#L,addr1,addr2  
program code and mnemonic display.  
(2)#DP,addr1,addr2 program area HEX display.  
(3)#DD,addr1,addr2 data area HEX display.  
(4)#DR  
register data display.  
(5)#H,addr1,addr2  
(6)#HB or #HG  
(7)#HS,addr  
(8)#HSW,addr  
(9)#HSR,addr  
(10)#HP  
history data display.  
history data display BACK or GO NEXT.  
history serch and display.  
memory write history serch and display.  
memory read history serch and display.  
current history pointer display.  
ice initial self test information display.  
X,Y register and MX,MY data display.  
(11)#CHK  
(12)#DXY  
(13)#CVD,addr1,addr2 coverage area display.  
(14)#HAD  
history PC area information display.  
#
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-87  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
HELP  
Format  
#HELP  
(With guidance)  
#HELP,n  
(n=1 to 8)  
#HELP,2  
Examples  
2.SET COMMAND  
(1)#A,addr  
(2)#FP,addr1,addr2,data  
(3)#FD,addr1,addr2,data  
assemble program.  
fill program addr1 to addr2 by data.  
fill data addr1 to addr2 by data.  
(4)#MP,addr1,addr2,addr3 move program from addr1..addr2 to addr3.  
(5)#MD,addr1,addr2,addr3 move data from addr1..addr2 to addr3.  
(6)#SP,addr  
(7)#SD,addr  
(8)#SR or #SR,reg,data  
(9)#SXY  
program area patch.  
data area patch.  
register patch.  
MX,MY patch.  
(10)#HC,S/C/E  
(11)#HA,addr1,addr2  
(#HA,ALL)  
(12)#HAR,addr1,addr2  
(#HAR,ALL)  
history Start/Center/End set.  
set PC addr1..addr2 save to history memory.  
(all data save.)  
inhibit PC addr1..addr2 save to history memory.  
(all reset.)  
(13)#HPS,addr  
(14)#CVR  
set history pointer.  
reset coverage information.  
#
#HELP,3  
3.BREAK and GO COMMAND  
(1)#BA,addr,...  
(2)#BD  
(3)#BR  
set break address.  
set break data condition.  
set break register condition.  
(4)#BM  
(5)#BAR  
set break address,data,register multiple condition.  
reset break address.  
(6)#BDR  
(7)#BRR  
reset break data condition.  
reset break register condition.  
(8)#BMR  
(9)#BRES  
reset break address,data,register multiple condition.  
reset all break condition.  
(10)#BC  
(11)#G or #G,addr  
(12)#G,R  
break condition display.  
GO current address or GO from set addr.  
GO after reset cpu.  
(13)#T,addr,step  
(14)#U,addr,step  
(15)#BSYN  
(16)#BE  
single step run and display break information.  
single step run in ICE. and display last break information.  
set break disable mode.  
set break enable mode.  
set and reset break trace made. (alternate)  
(17)#BT  
(18)#BRKSEL,CLR/REM set break address clear mode or remain mode.  
#
VIII-88  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
HELP  
Format  
#HELP  
(With guidance)  
#HELP,n  
(n=1 to 8)  
#HELP,4  
Examples  
4.FILE COMMAND  
(1)#RF,file  
(2)#VF,file  
(3)#WF,file  
(4)#RFD,file  
(5)#VFD,file  
(6)#WFD,file  
(7)#CL,file  
(8)#CS,file  
program load.  
program verify.  
program save.  
RAM data load.  
RAM data verity.  
RAM data save.  
program,RAM data,break condition load.  
program,RAM data,break condition save.  
(9)#OPTLD,option no.,file HEXA data load.  
#
#HELP,5  
5.ROM COMMAND  
(1)#RP  
program load from ROM.  
(2)#VP  
program verify ice:ROM.  
(3)#ROM  
ROM type select. (64,128,256,512)  
#
#HELP,6  
6.CONTROL COMMAND  
(1)#I  
reset target CPU.  
(2)#TIM  
(3)#OTF  
(4)#Q  
set step count mode or time count mode. (alternate)  
set on-the-fly display mode or inhibit mode. (alternate)  
program exit.  
#
#HELP,8  
8.BASIC COMMAND  
(1)#L,addr1,addr2  
program code and mnemonic display.  
(2)#DD,addr1,addr2 data area HEX display.  
(3)#DR  
(4)#BC  
register data display.  
break condition display.  
(5)#H,addr1,addr2  
(6)#A,addr  
(7)#SP,addr  
(8)#SD,addr  
(9)#SR  
(10)#BA,addr,...  
(11)#BD  
history data display.  
assemble program.  
program area patch.  
data area patch.  
register patch.  
set break address.  
set break data condition.  
set break register condition.  
set break address,data,register multiple condition.  
reset all break condition.  
GO current address or GO from set address.  
single step run and display break information.  
program,RAM data,break condition load.  
program,RAM data,break condition save.  
reset target CPU.  
(12)#BR  
(13)#BM  
(14)#BRES  
(15)#G or #G,addr  
(16)#T,addr,step  
(17)#CL,file  
(18)#CS,file  
(19)#I  
(20)#Q  
program exit.  
#
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-89  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
4 ERROR MESSAGE SUMMARY  
Error message:  
Meaning:  
* COMMUNICATION ERROR OR ICE NOT READY *  
ICE is disconnected or power is OFF.  
Recovery procedure: Switch OFF the host power supply, connect cable, and reapply power.  
Or switch ON power to ICE.  
Error message:  
Meaning:  
* TARGET DOWN(1) *  
Evaluation board is disconnected. (Check at power ON)  
Recovery procedure: Switch OFF power to ICE, and connect the evaluation board.  
Then, apply power to ICE.  
Error message:  
Meaning:  
* TARGET DOWN(2) *  
Evaluation board disconnected. (Check at command execution)  
Recovery procedure: Switch OFF power to ICE, and connect the evaluation board.  
Then, apply power to ICE.  
Error message:  
Meaning:  
* UNDEFINED PROGRAM CODE EXIST *  
Undefined code is detected in the program loaded from ROM.  
(ICE program terminates)  
Recovery procedure: Convert ROM data with the S1C62XXX cross assembler,  
then restart the ICE.  
Error message:  
Meaning:  
* COMMAND ERROR *  
A miss occurs by command input.  
Recovery procedure: Reenter the proper command.  
Error:  
No response after power on.  
Meaning:  
The ICE-to-HOST cable is disconnected on the host side.  
Recovery procedure: Connect the cable.  
VIII-90  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
ICE CONTROL SOFTWARE ICS62XX  
APPENDIX. HEX FILE FORMAT  
Description of HEX file format  
Example:  
Data volume Type  
Address  
Data  
Sum check  
: 10010000CD15010E20CD2901CD47010C79FE7FC20E  
: 100110000501C303012124017EA7CA2301D3D123F2  
: 10012000C31801C9AA40CE3700DBD1E604CA2901B1  
: 1001300079D3D0C9CD3F01CA3401DBD0E67FC9DB1A  
: 10014000D1E602C83EFFC9CD3F01FE00CA5C01CD29  
: 100150003401FE03CA5D01FE13CC6001C9C3000077  
: 10016000CD3F01FE00CA6001CD3401FE13C2600123  
: 10017000C9000000000000000000000000000000B6  
: 00000001FF  
End mark  
Data volume (1 byte): Indicates the quantity of data contained in the data area.  
Maximum capacity is 10H (sixteen entries).  
Address (2 bytes):  
Indicates the top line of data at each address.  
Type (1 byte):  
Indicates the type of hexadecimal format, currently only 00.  
Data (16 bytes max.): Data is shown in hexadecimal format.  
Sum check (1 byte):  
Two complements resulting from adding all bytes from "data volume  
bytes" to "final data byte" are expressed as hexadecimal values.  
End mark:  
Required to mark the end of the hex file.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
VIII-91  
IX  
MASK DATA CHECKER  
MDC62XX  
This part explains how to operate the MDC62XX  
Mask Data Checker for the S1C62 Family.  
MASK DATA CHECKER MDC62XX  
MASK DATA CHECKER MDC62XX  
Co nte nts  
1 DIFFERENCES DEPENDING ON THE MODEL __________________ IX-1  
2 MDC62XX OUTLINE __________________________________________ IX-1  
2.1 Outline ................................................................................................................... IX-1  
2.2 Execution Flow and Input/Output Files ................................................................ IX-1  
3 MASK DATA CHECKER OPERATION ___________________________ IX-2  
3.1 Copying the Data File ........................................................................................... IX-2  
3.2 Execution of MDC62XX ........................................................................................ IX-2  
3.2.1 Starting MDC62XX.......................................................................................IX-2  
3.2.2 Packing of data .............................................................................................IX-3  
3.2.3 Unpacking of data ........................................................................................IX-3  
4 ERROR MESSAGES ___________________________________________ IX-4  
4.1 Data Error ............................................................................................................. IX-4  
4.1.1 Program data error ......................................................................................IX-4  
4.1.2 Function option data error ...........................................................................IX-4  
4.1.3 Segment option data error ............................................................................IX-4  
4.2 File Error .............................................................................................................. IX-4  
4.3 System Error .......................................................................................................... IX-4  
5 PACK FILE CONFIGURATION _________________________________ IX-5  
5.1 Program Data, Melody ROM Data and Scale ROM Data.................................... IX-6  
5.2 Segment Data ........................................................................................................ IX-6  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
IX-i  
MASK DATA CHECKER MDC62XX  
1 DIFFERENCES DEPENDING ON THE MODEL  
Depending on the model, the MDC62XX input/ output file and the below two types of files in the  
program that prepares the file may not be available.  
(1) The SOG62XX and C2XXYYYS.DOC are only set in models that have the segment option.  
(2) The MLA628X and C28XYYYA.DOC are only set in models that have the melody function.  
When models that do not have the above functions are used, disregard the respectively below indicated  
program names and data file names.  
Refer to the "S5U1C62xxxD Manual" for the software tools included in the S5U1C62xxxD.  
2 MDC62XX OUTLINE  
2.1 Outline  
The Mask Data Checker MDC62XX is a software tool which checks the program data (C2XXYYYH.HEX  
and C2XXYYYL.HEX), option data (C2XXYYYF.DOC and C2XXYYYS.DOC), and melody data  
(C28XYYYA.DOC) created by the user and creates the data file (C62XXYYY.PAn) for generating mask  
patterns. The user must send the file generated through this software tool to Seiko Epson.  
Moreover, MDC62XX has the capability to restore the generated data file (C62XXYYY.PA0) to the original  
file format (C2XXYYYH.HEX, C2XXYYYL.HEX, C2XXYYYF.DOC, C2XXYYYS.DOC and C28XYYYA.DOC).  
2.2 Execution Flow and Input/Output Files  
The execution flow for MDC62XX is  
shown in Figure 2.2.1.  
C2XXYYYH  
.HEX  
C2XXYYYL  
.HEX  
C2XXYYYF  
.DOC  
C2XXYYYS  
.DOC  
C28XYYYA  
.DOC  
(1)  
(2)  
(4)  
(3)  
MDC62XX  
C62XXYYY  
.PAn  
SEIKO EPSON  
Fig. 2.2.1 MDC62XX execution flow  
MDC62XX  
(5)  
C2XXYYYH  
.PAn  
C2XXYYYL  
.PAn  
C2XXYYYF  
.PAn  
C2XXYYYS  
.PAn  
C28XYYYA  
.PAn  
(1) Preparation of program data files (C2XXYYYH.HEX and C2XXYYYL.HEX)  
Prepare the program data files generated from the Cross Assembler (ASM62XX).  
(2) Preparation of option data files (C2XXYYYF.DOC and C2XXYYYS.DOC)  
Prepare the option data files (function option and segment option) generated from the Option Genera-  
tor (FOG62XX and SOG62XX).  
(3) Preparation of melody data file (C28XYYYA.DOC)  
Prepare the melody data file generated from the Melody Assembler (MLA628X).  
(4) Packing of data  
Using the Mask Data Checker (MDC62XX), compile the program data, option data and melody data in  
one mask data file (C62XXYYY.PAn). This file must be sent to Seiko Epson.  
(5) Unpacking of data  
The mask data file (C62XXYYY.PAn) may be restored to the original program data, option data and  
melody data files using the Mask Data Checker (MDC62XX).  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
IX-1  
MASK DATA CHECKER MDC62XX  
3 MASK DATA CHECKER OPERATION  
3.1 Copying the Data File  
When submitting data to Seiko Epson, copy on the work disk the data generated from Cross Assembler  
(ASM62XX), Function Option Generator (FOG62XX), Segment Option Generator (SOG62XX) and Melody  
Assembler (MLA628X).  
Be sure to assign the following file names (the YYY portion of the file name should be as designated by  
Seiko Epson):  
Program data (HIGH side):  
C2XXYYYH.HEX  
C2XXYYYL.HEX  
C2XXYYYF.DOC  
C2XXYYYS.DOC  
(LOW side):  
Option data  
(function option):  
(segment option):  
Melody data (melody ROM, scale ROM, melody option): C28XYYYA.DOC  
3.2 Execution of MDC62XX  
3.2.1 Starting MDC62XX  
To start MDC62XX, insert the work disk into the current drive at the DOS command level (state in which a  
prompt such as A> is displayed) and then enter the program name as follows:  
A>MDC62XX  
*
means press the return key.  
When starting MDC62XX through the DMS6200, selects the "MDC62XX.EXE" in the menu screen.  
When MDC62XX is started, the following message is displayed:  
*** E0C62XX PACK / UNPACK PROGRAM Ver 1.00 ***  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEE  
PPPPPPPP  
SSSSSSS  
SSS SSSS  
SSS SSS  
SSS  
SSSSSS  
SSSS  
SSS  
SSS  
SSS  
SSSSSSS  
OOOOOOOO  
OOO OOO  
OOO OOO  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
PPPPPPPPPP  
NNNN  
NNNNN  
PPP  
PPP  
PPP  
PPP  
EEE  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
OOO  
NNNNNN NNN  
NNN NNN NNN  
NNN NNNNNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
NNN  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEE  
EEE  
EEEEEEEEEE  
EEEEEEEEEE  
PPPPPPPPPP  
PPPPPPPP  
PPP  
NNNNN  
NNNN  
NNN  
PPP  
SSS  
SSSS  
PPP  
OOO  
OOO  
PPP  
OOOOOOOO  
NN  
(C) COPYRIGHT 1991 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION  
--- OPERATION MENU ---  
1. PACK  
2. UNPACK  
PLEASE SELECT NO.? 1  
Here, the user is prompted to select operation options. When creating mask data for submission to Seiko  
Epson, select "1"; when the mask data is to be split and restored to the original format (C2XXYYYH.HEX,  
C2XXYYYL.HEX, C2XXYYYF.DOC, C2XXYYYS.DOC and C28XYYYA.DOC), select "2".  
IX-2  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
MASK DATA CHECKER MDC62XX  
3.2.2 Packing of data  
When generating data for submission to Seiko Epson, selecting "1" in the above Section, "Starting  
MDC62XX" will prompt for the name of the file to be generated as follows:  
The YYY portion is as specified for the user  
C2XXYYYH.HEX ------+  
|
by Seiko Epson. Moreover, after submitting  
the data to Seiko Epson and there is a need  
to re-submit the data for reasons such as  
faulty programs, etc., increase the numeric  
value of "n" by one when the input is made.  
C2XXYYYL.HEX ------+  
|
C2XXYYYF.DOC ------+------ C2XXYYY.PAn (PACK FILE)  
|
C2XXYYYS.DOC ------+  
|
C28XYYYA.DOC ------+  
(Example: When re-submiting data after  
"C62XXYYY.PA0" has been submitted, the pack  
file name should be entered as "C62XXYYY.PA1".)  
PLEASE INPUT PACK FILE NAME (C62XXYYY.PAn) ?  
C62XXYYY.PA0  
When data is packed, there is need to create ROM data file and option data file in the work disk beforehand.  
When the file name has been input, mask data is generated and the corresponding file names are displayed.  
C2XXYYYH.HEX ------+  
With this, the mask file (C62XXYYY.PAn)  
is generated. Submit this file to Seiko  
Epson.  
|
C2XXYYYL.HEX ------+  
|
C2XXYYYF.DOC ------+------ C2XXYYY.PA0  
|
C2XXYYYS.DOC ------+  
|
C28XYYYA.DOC ------+  
Note Don’t use the data generated with the -N option of the Cross Assembler (ASM62XX) as program  
data. If the program data generated with the -N option of the Cross Assembler is packed, undefined  
program area is filled with FFH code.  
In this case, following message is displayed.  
WARNING: FILLED <file_name> FILE WITH FFH.  
3.2.3 Unpacking of data  
In the process of restoring the packed data to the original file, when "2" is selected in the step described in  
"Starting MDC62XX", the user is prompted for the input file name as follows:  
PLEASE INPUT PACKED FILE NAME (C62XXYYY.PAn) ? C62XXYYY.PA0  
When the file name has been entered, the unpacking process is executed and the corresponding file names  
are displayed.  
+------ C2XXYYYH.PA0  
With this, the mask data file  
(C62XXYYY.PAn) is restored to the  
original file format, making it possible to  
make comparison with the original data.  
|
+------ C2XXYYYL.PA0  
|
C62XXYYY.PA0 ------+------ C2XXYYYF.PA0  
|
+------ C2XXYYYS.PA0  
|
+------ C28XYYYA.PA0  
The restored data file names will be as follows:  
Program data (HIGH side):  
C2XXYYYH.PAn  
C2XXYYYL.PAn  
C2XXYYYF.PAn  
C2XXYYYS.PAn  
(LOW side):  
Option data  
(function option):  
(segment option):  
Melody data (melody ROM, scale ROM, melody option): C28XYYYA.PAn  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
IX-3  
MASK DATA CHECKER MDC62XX  
4 ERROR MESSAGES  
4.1 Data Error  
The program data file and option data file and melody data file are checked during packing; the packed  
data file is checked during unpacking.  
If there are format problems, the following error messages are displayed.  
4.1.1 Program data error  
Error Message  
Explanation  
1. HEX DATA ERROR : NOT COLON.  
There is no colon.  
2. HEX DATA ERROR : DATA LENGTH. (NOT 00-20h) The data length of 1 line is not in the 0020H range.  
3. HEX DATA ERROR : ADDRESS.  
The address is beyond the valid range of the program,  
melody and scale ROM.  
4. HEX DATA ERROR : RECORD TYPE. (NOT 00)  
5. HEX DATA ERROR : DATA. (NOT 00-FFh)  
The record type of 1 line is not 00.  
The data is not in the range between 00H and 0FFH.  
6. HEX DATA ERROR : TOO MANY DATA IN ONE LINE. There are too many data in 1 line.  
7. HEX DATA ERROR : CHECK SUM.  
8. HEX DATA ERROR : END MARK.  
9. HEX DATA ERROR : DUPLICATE.  
The checksum is not correct.  
The end mark is not : 00000001FF.  
There is duplicate definition of data in the same address.  
4.1.2 Function option data error  
Error Message  
Explanation  
The start mark is not "\OPTION". (during unpacking) *  
The option number is not correct.  
1. OPTION DATA ERROR : START MARK.  
2. OPTION DATA ERROR : OPTION NUMBER.  
3. OPTION DATA ERROR : SELECT NUMBER.  
4. OPTION DATA ERROR : END MARK.  
The option selection number is not correct.  
The end mark is not "\\END" (packing) or "\END" (unpacking).*  
* \ sometimes appears as ¥, depending on the personal computer being used.  
4.1.3 Segment option data error  
Error Message  
Explanation  
The start mark is not "\SEGMENT". (during unpacking) *  
The segment data is not correct.  
1. SEGMENT DATA ERROR : START MARK.  
2. SEGMENT DATA ERROR : DATA.  
3. SEGMENT DATA ERROR : SEGMENT NUMBER.  
4. SEGMENT DATA ERROR : SPEC.  
The SEG No. is not correct.  
The output specification of the SEG terminal is not correct.  
The end mark is not "\\END" (packing) or "\END" (unpacking).*  
* \ sometimes appears as ¥, depending on the personal computer being used.  
5. SEGMENT DATA ERROR : END MARK.  
4.2 File Error  
Error Message  
Explanation  
1. <File_name> FILE IS NOT FOUND.  
The file is not found or the file number set in CONFIG.SYS  
is less than 10.  
2. PACK FILE NAME (File_name) ERROR.  
3. PACKED FILE NAME (File_name) ERROR.  
The packed input format for the file name is wrong.  
The unpacked input format for the file name is wrong.  
4.3 System Error  
Error Message  
Explanation  
The directory is full.  
1. DIRECTORY FULL.  
2. DISK WRITE ERROR.  
Writing on the disk is failed.  
IX-4  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
MASK DATA CHECKER MDC62XX  
5 PACK FILE CONFIGURATION  
The pack file is configured according to the following format:  
*
* E0C62XX MASK DATA VER 1.00  
*
Program Data Header  
Model Name  
\ROM1  
E0C62XXYYY PROGRAM ROM  
:100000000.................................  
:100010000.................................  
Program Data  
High Side (Intel Hexa Format)  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:00000001FF  
:100000000.................................  
:100010000.................................  
Program Data  
Low Side (Intel Hexa Format)  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:00000001FF  
\END  
End Mark  
Melody ROM Header  
Model Name  
\ROM2  
E0C628XYYY MELODY ROM  
:100000000.................................  
Melody ROM Data  
High Side (Intel Hexa Format)  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:00000001FF  
:10000000..................................  
Melody ROM Data  
Low Side (Intel Hexa Format)  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:00000001FF  
\END  
End Mark  
Melody Scale ROM Header  
Model Name  
Melody Scale ROM Data  
(Intel Hexa Format)  
End Mark  
\ROM3  
E0C628XYYY SCALE ROM  
:10000000..................................  
:00000001FF  
\END  
\OPTION1  
*
Melody Option Data Header  
*
*
OCTAVE CIRCUIT  
32kHz ---------------------------- SELECTED  
Melody Option Data  
OPT2001 01  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
OPT2104 04  
\END  
End Mark  
Function Option Header  
\OPTION2  
* E0C62XX FUNCTION OPTION DOCUMENT VER 3.00  
*
* FILE NAME  
C2XXYYYF.DOC  
* USER'S NAME SEIKO EPSON CORP.  
* INPUT DATE  
*
91/07/22  
Function Option Data  
* OPTION NO.1  
* < DEVICE TYPE >  
*
E0C62XX ( NORMAL TYPE ) --------- SELECTED  
OPT0101 01  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
End Mark  
Segment Option Header  
\END  
\SEGMENT  
* E0C62XX SEGMENT OPTION DOCUMENT VER 3.00  
*
* FILE NAME  
C2XXYYYS.DOC  
* USER'S NAME SEIKO EPSON CORP.  
* INPUT DATE  
* COMMENT  
91/07/22  
TOKYO DESIGN CENTER  
*
421-8 HINO HINO-SHI TOKYO 191 JAPAN  
Segment Option Data  
*
*
* OPTION NO.xx  
*
* < LCD SEGMENT DECODE TABLE >  
*
* SEG COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3  
*
0 ... ... ... ... S  
1 ... ... ... ... C  
:
:
:
:
:
End Mark  
\END  
* \ sometimes appears as ¥, depending on the personal computer being used.  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
EPSON  
IX-5  
MASK DATA CHECKER MDC62XX  
5.1 Program Data, Melody ROM Data and Scale ROM Data  
The program data, melody ROM data and scale ROM data are expressed as follows, using Intel hexa  
format:  
Data line  
Colon 10 Address (4 digit) 00  
Data 0  
. . .  
Data 15 Check sum  
Two complements resulting from  
adding all bytes of data in 1 line  
Hexadecimal 8-bit data  
Fixed at 00 (record type)  
Address is given in hexadecimal  
Fixed at 10 (data length in 1 line)  
Fixed at :  
End mark  
: 00000001FF  
5.2 Segment Data  
Segment data is configuerd according to the following format:  
* OPTION NO.xx  
*
* < LCD SEGMENT DECODE TABLE >  
*
* SEG COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3  
*
0 ... ... ... ...  
1 ... ... ... ...  
S
S
:
:
:
:
:
:
SEG terminal output specification (alphabet: uppercase)  
Segment memory data bit  
Segment memory low-order address  
Segment memory high-order address  
COM3  
COM2  
COM1  
COM0  
Segment memory data bit  
Segment memory low-order address  
Segment memory high-order address  
Segment memory data bit  
Segment memory low-order address  
Segment memory high-order address  
Segment memory data bit  
Segment memory low-order address  
Segment memory high-order address  
SEG terminal number  
IX-6  
EPSON  
S1C62 FAMILY  
DEVELOPMENT TOOL REFERENCE MANUAL  
International Sales Operations  
AMERICA  
ASIA  
EPSON ELECTRONICS AMERICA, INC.  
EPSON (CHINA) CO., LTD.  
28F, Beijing Silver Tower 2# North RD DongSanHuan  
ChaoYang District, Beijing, CHINA  
- HEADQUARTERS -  
150 River Oaks Parkway  
San Jose, CA 95134, U.S.A.  
Phone: 64106655  
Fax: 64107319  
Phone: +1-408-922-0200  
Fax: +1-408-922-0238  
SHANGHAI BRANCH  
4F, Bldg., 27, No. 69, Gui Jing Road  
Caohejing, Shanghai, CHINA  
- SALES OFFICES -  
West  
Phone: 21-6485-5552  
Fax: 21-6485-0775  
1960 E. Grand Avenue  
EPSON HONG KONG LTD.  
20/F., Harbour Centre, 25 Harbour Road  
Wanchai, Hong Kong  
EI Segundo, CA 90245, U.S.A.  
Phone: +1-310-955-5300  
Fax: +1-310-955-5400  
Central  
Phone: +852-2585-4600 Fax: +852-2827-4346  
Telex: 65542 EPSCO HX  
101 Virginia Street, Suite 290  
Crystal Lake, IL 60014, U.S.A.  
Phone: +1-815-455-7630  
Fax: +1-815-455-7633  
EPSON TAIWAN TECHNOLOGY & TRADING LTD.  
10F, No. 287, Nanking East Road, Sec. 3  
Taipei  
Northeast  
301 Edgewater Place, Suite 120  
Phone: 02-2717-7360  
Fax: 02-2712-9164  
Wakefield, MA 01880, U.S.A.  
Telex: 24444 EPSONTB  
Phone: +1-781-246-3600  
Fax: +1-781-246-5443  
HSINCHU OFFICE  
13F-3, No. 295, Kuang-Fu Road, Sec. 2  
HsinChu 300  
Southeast  
3010 Royal Blvd. South, Suite 170  
Alpharetta, GA 30005, U.S.A.  
Phone: +1-877-EEA-0020 Fax: +1-770-777-2637  
Phone: 03-573-9900  
Fax: 03-573-9169  
EPSON SINGAPORE PTE., LTD.  
No. 1 Temasek Avenue, #36-00  
EUROPE  
Millenia Tower, SINGAPORE 039192  
Phone: +65-337-7911  
Fax: +65-334-2716  
EPSON EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH  
SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION KOREA OFFICE  
50F, KLI 63 Bldg., 60 Yoido-dong  
Youngdeungpo-Ku, Seoul, 150-763, KOREA  
- HEADQUARTERS -  
Riesstrasse 15  
80992 Munich, GERMANY  
Phone: 02-784-6027  
Fax: 02-767-3677  
Phone: +49-(0)89-14005-0  
Fax: +49-(0)89-14005-110  
SALES OFFICE  
Altstadtstrasse 176  
51379 Leverkusen, GERMANY  
Phone: +49-(0)2171-5045-0  
SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION  
ELECTRONIC DEVICES MARKETING DIVISION  
Fax: +49-(0)2171-5045-10  
Electronic Device Marketing Department  
IC Marketing & Engineering Group  
421-8, Hino, Hino-shi, Tokyo 191-8501, JAPAN  
UK BRANCH OFFICE  
Unit 2.4, Doncastle House, Doncastle Road  
Bracknell, Berkshire RG12 8PE, ENGLAND  
Phone: +81-(0)42-587-5816  
Fax: +81-(0)42-587-5624  
Phone: +44-(0)1344-381700  
Fax: +44-(0)1344-381701  
ED International Marketing Department Europe & U.S.A.  
421-8, Hino, Hino-shi, Tokyo 191-8501, JAPAN  
FRENCH BRANCH OFFICE  
1 Avenue de l' Atlantique, LP 915 Les Conquerants  
Phone: +81-(0)42-587-5812  
Fax: +81-(0)42-587-5564  
Z.A. de Courtaboeuf 2, F-91976 Les Ulis Cedex, FRANCE  
ED International Marketing Department Asia  
Phone: +33-(0)1-64862350  
Fax: +33-(0)1-64862355  
421-8, Hino, Hino-shi, Tokyo 191-8501, JAPAN  
Phone: +81-(0)42-587-5814  
Fax: +81-(0)42-587-5110  
BARCELONA BRANCH OFFICE  
Barcelona Design Center  
Edificio Prima Sant Cugat  
Avda. Alcalde Barrils num. 64-68  
E-08190 Sant Cugat del Vallès, SPAIN  
Phone: +34-93-544-2490  
Fax: +34-93-544-2491  
In pursuit of “SavingTechnology, Epson electronic devices.  
Our lineup of semiconductors, liquid crystal displays and quartz devices  
assists in creating the products of our customers’ dreams.  
Epson IS energy savings.  
S1C62 Family  
Development Tool Reference Manual  
ELECTRONIC DEVICES MARKETING DIVISION  
EPSON Electronic Devices Website  
http://www.epson.co.jp/device/  
First issue December, 1991  
M
Printed April, 2001 in Japan  
B

Frigidaire 30 User Manual
Fisher Paykel TITAN CG913 User Manual
Ericsson DT310 User Manual
Electrolux Thermaline WHWURFOOOO User Manual
Cypress CY14B104N User Manual
BT Freestyle 750 User Manual
Bosch Appliances Computer Hardware SMB365 User Manual
Asus Computer Monitor VE208 User Manual
Arcam Amplifiers P90 User Manual
Abit NF7 S User Manual